SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules North American Edition SINAMICS Drives Catalog D 21.7 Part 1 2013 Answers for industry. The Engineering Manual Related Catalogs SINAMICS S120 D21.3 • 2011 Chassis Units and Cabinet Modules (IEC) SINAMICS S150 Drive Converter Cabinet Units (IEC) SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual SINAMICS S120 Chassis Format Units and Cabinet Modules SINAMICS S150 Converter Cabinet Units Catalog D 21.3 • 2011 Engineering Manual for SINAMICS G130 Drive Chassis, SINAMICS G150 Enclosed Drives, SINAMICS S120 Drive Chassis, SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules, SINAMICS S150 Enclosed Drives E86060-K5521-A131-A3-7600 DRCA-21300-0412 SINAMICS Drives Answers for industry. SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 and Motors for Production Machines Catalog PM 21 • 2011 SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 and Motors for Production Machines Catalog PM 21 • 2011 SINAMICS S120 Chassis Format Units and Cabinet Modules SINAMICS S150 Converter Cabinet Units Catalog D 21.3 • 2011 E86060-K4921-A101-A2-7600 DRCA-K4921-0111 SINAMICS G150 NEMA Enclosed Drives Motion Control Answers for industry. D11.7.1 • 2013 SINAMICS Drives DRCA-D1171-0313 Answers for industry. SINAMICS G150 NEMA Enclosed Drives SINAMICS Drives Siemens Industry, Inc. 3333 Old Milton Parkway Alpharetta, GA 30005 1-800-241-4453 [email protected] www.usa.siemens.com/drives Subject to change without prior notice. Order No: DRCA-D1171-0313 All rights reserved. Printed in USA. ©2013 Siemens Industry, Inc. The information provided in this brochure contains merely general descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of further development of the products. An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract. Catalog D 11.7 Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG. Product names mentioned may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Specificationsare subject to change without notice. Part 1 2013 Answers for industry. SINAMICS G130 D11 • 2011 Drive Converter Chassis Units SINAMICS G150 Drive Converter Cabinet Units (IEC) SINAMICS G130 Drive Converter Chassis Units SINAMICS G150 Drive Converter Cabinet Units Catalog D 11 • 2011 E86050-K5511-A101-A5-7600 DRCA-D1100-0412 SINAMICS and Motors for Single-Axis Drives SINAMICS Drives Answers for industry. SINAMICS and Motors for Single-Axis Drives Catalog D 31 • 2012 D31 • 2012 E86050-K5531-A101-A1-7600 DRCA-D3112-0412 This manual offers users comprehensive support for the configuring of drives and associated system components. Motion Control Drives Answers for industry. Low Voltage AC Motors D81.2 • 2012 Selection and Pricing Guide, USA Edition Low Voltage AC Motors Selection and Pricing Guide Catalog D81.2 - 2012, USA Edition NMPC-00600-0212 SIMOTICS NEMA Motors www.usa.siemens.com/nema-motors E86060-K5581-A111-A4-7600 SIMOTICS Low-Voltage Motors Type series 1LE, 1PC, 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ Frame sizes 63 to 450 Power range 0.09 to 1250 kW Catalog D 81.1 • January 2012 E86060-K5512-A101-A3-7600 t i o n a l Ef f i c i en IE changeover Premium Ef ficiency The first three chapters are devoted primarily to the fundamental physical principles of variable speed electric drives and include EMC Installation Guidelines as well as general system descriptions and planning information which relate to all products in the SINAMICS range. The other chapters then discuss in detail questions relating to the dimensioning of specific drive models as well as the selection of suitable motors. High Ef ficiency Standard Ef ficiency Motors Answers for industry. SINAMICS GM150, SINAMICS SM150 Medium Voltage Converters D12 • 2012 na In t er cy SIMOTICS Low-Voltage Motors (IEC) D81.1 • 2012 Frame sizes 63 to 450 Power range 0.09 to 1250 kW The engineering manual is divided into the following chapters: - Fundamental Principles and System Description - EMC Installation Guideline - General Engineering Information for SINAMICS - SINAMICS G130 Converter Chassis Units - SINAMICS G150 Converter Cabinet Units - SINAMICS S120 Chassis Format Units and Cabinet Modules - SINAMICS S150 Converter Cabinet Units - Drive Dimensioning - Motors Note: The engineering manual is not available as a printed hard copy, but only as an electronic file in PDF format. SINAMICS Drives SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules North American Edition Introduction The SINAMICS drives family 1 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules system overview 2 NEMA/UL and IEC versions UL listing of a Cabinet Module line-up System configuration guidelines Catalog D21.7 (part 1) • 2013 Line Modules Line Connection Modules Basic Line Modules Smart Line Modules Active Line Modules Quality The products and systems described in this catalog are produced/ distributed in accordance with the requirements of a quality management system which has been certified to ISO 9001:2008. © Siemens AG 2013 Motor Modules Motor Modules chassis format Motor Modules booksize format Braking Modules (chassis mounted) Braking Modules (motor modules) Auxiliary Modules, Options Auxiliary Power Supply Modules Custom Cabinet Modules Integration Engineering Description of Options Engineering Information Technical Data Characteristic curves (derating, overloads) Control units and interfaces Sensor and I/O modules Connection system – Signal Cables Safety Integrated Engineering Tools, Services & Support Engineering Software Service & Support 3 4 5 6 7 SINAMICS Drives One Family, One Source, All Applications Application SINAMICS is the family of drives from Siemens designed for industrial applications that offers solutions for all drive tasks: Basic pump and fan applications in the process industry. Complex single-motor drives in centrifuges, presses, extruders, elevators, as well as conveyor and transport systems Coordinated drive line-ups for textile, plastic film, and paper machines, as well as for rolling mills High precision servo drives for machining Highly dynamic servo drives for machine tools, as well as packaging and printing machines Product variants The SINAMICS range offers the ideal variant for all drive tasks: SINAMICS G is designed for standard applications, mostly with induction motors, that have less stringent requirements on the dynamic performance. SINAMICS S handles complex drive tasks with synchronous or induction motors and fulfills the most stringent requirements regarding - the dynamic performance and control accuracy - integration of extensive technological functions in the drive control system. SINAMICS DCM is the DC drive in the SINAMICS family. It can be configured to address both basic as well as demanding drive applications. 0/2 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 Platform concept and Totally Integrated Automation All SINAMICS versions are based on a platform concept. Common hardware and software components, as well as standardized tools for design, configuration, and commissioning tasks ensure high-level integration across all components. SINAMICS covers the full range of drive applications. The different SINAMICS versions can be easily combined with each other. SINAMICS is part of the Siemens “Totally Integrated Automation” concept. Integrated SINAMICS systems covering engineering, data management and communication at the automation level, result in extremely cost effective solutions based on SIMOTION (motion control), SINUMERIK (machine tool) and SIMATIC (PLC and DCS) control systems. Quality management to ISO 9001 SINAMICS meets the highest quality requirements. Comprehensive quality assurance measures in all development, engineering and production processes ensure a consistently high level of quality. Of course, our quality management systems are certified by independent authorities in accordance with ISO 9001. SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules 5 Introduction 1/2 The members of the SINAMICS drives family SINAMICS low voltage drives SINAMICS DC drives SINAMICS medium voltage drives The SINAMICS S120 range Siemens D21.7 – 2013 1 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules 1 Introduction The SINAMICS drives family SINAMICS low voltage drives SINAMICS G110 SINAMICS G120 SINAMICS G110D SINAMICS G120D The versatile single motor drive for low power ratings The modular single motor drive for low up to medium power ratings The distributed single motor drive for basic solutions The distributed single motor drive for high performance 380 to 690 V 3 ph. AC 0.15 to 400 HP (0.37 to 250 kW) 380 to 480 V 3 ph. AC 1 to 10 HP (0.75 to 7.5 kW) 380 to 480 V 3 ph. AC 1 to 10 HP (0.75 to 7.5 kW) Machine and plants for industrial and commercial applications Horizontal conveyor applications,main focus on distribution and logistics in airports; suitable for basic conveyor-related tasks with local control or connected to a bus via ASInterface Conveyor applications in industrial environments, main focus on the automotive industry; also suitable for high-performance applications e.g. at airports and in the food, beverage and tobacco industry •Pumps •Fans •Compressors •Conveyor systems •Airports •Distribution logistics •Conveyor systems •Electric monorail system in distribution Logistics •Compact •Can be flexibly adapted to different applications •Simple and fast commissioning •Clear terminal layout •Optimum interaction with SIMATIC and LOGO! •Modular •Can be flexibly expanded •Safety Integrated •Simple and fast commissioning •Regenerative feedback •Innovative cooling concept •Optimum interaction with SIMOTION and SIMATIC •Low profile design with standard footprint, IP65 •Easy, fast commissioning •Optional key-operated disconnect switch •AS-Interface with bus parameterization •Quick stop function •Integrated brake control •Optimum interaction with SIMATIC and LOGO! •Low profile design with standard footprint, IP65 •Modular •Can be flexibly expanded •Easy, fast commissioning •Regenerative feedback •Optimum interaction with SIMOTION and SIMATIC •SINAMICS Safety Integrated Catalog D31 Catalog D31 Catalog D31 Catalog D31 Typical ratings 230 V 1 ph. AC in / 3 ph. out 0.15 to 4 HP (0.12 to 3 kW) Main applications Machine and plants for industrial and commercial applications Application examples •Simple pumps and fans •Auxiliary drives •Conveyor systems •Billboards •Door/gate operating mechanisms Highlights 1/2 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Introduction The SINAMICS drives family SINAMICS low voltage drives SINAMICS G120E SINAMICS G130 SINAMICS G150 SINAMICS G150 NEMA The versatile enclosed drive for low to medium power ratings The modular single motor drive solution for drives with a high power rating The universal enclosed drive solution for drives with a high power rating The universal high power enclosed drive solution per North American standards 380 to 690 V 3 ph. AC 100 to 800 HP (75 to 560 kW) 380 to 690 V 3 ph. AC 100 to 1,250 HP (75 to 2,700 kW) 380 to 600 V 3 ph. AC 150 to 800 HP (110 to 560 kW) Applications in the process and production industry, including power stations, oil and gas, petrochemicals, paper, cement, stone, metals Applications in the process and production industry, including power stations, oil and gas, petrochemicals, paper, cement, stone, metals Applications in the process and production industry, including power stations, oil and gas, petrochemicals, paper, cement, stone, metals •Pumps and fans •Compressors •Extruders and mixers •Crushers •Grinding mills •Kilns •Test stands •Pumps and fans •Compressors •Extruders and mixers •Crushers •Grinding mills •Marine propulsion •Test stands •Pumps and fans •Compressors •Extruders and mixers •Crushers •Grinding mills •Kilns •Test stands •Ready to connect and run •Flexibility based on G120 modular components •Optional power regeneration •UL508C listed •Safety Integrated •Optimum interaction with SIMOTION and SIMATIC •Modular components •Space-saving •Low noise •Easy, quick commissioning •Optimum interaction with SIMATIC •Safety Integrated •Ready to connect and run enclosed drive per IEC standards •Broad power range •Space-saving •Low noise •Easy, quick commissioning •Optimum interaction with SIMATIC •Safety Integrated •Ready to connect and run enclosed drive per NEMA/ANSI standards •Optional listing to UL508A •Low noise •Easy, quick commissioning •Safety Integrated – Catalog D11 Catalog D11 Catalog D11.7 Part 1 Typical ratings 380 to 480 V 3 ph. AC 1 to 200 HP (0.75 to 132 kW) Main applications Standard and regenerative industrial applications in water, chemicals, oil and gas, packaging, paper, metals, minerals and others Application examples •Pumps and fans •Compressors •Conveyors •Mixers •Kilns Highlights Siemens D21.7 – 2013 1/3 1 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules 1 Introduction The SINAMICS drives family SINAMICS low voltage drives SINAMICS DC drives SINAMICS S110 SINAMICS S120 SINAMICS S150 SINAMICS DCM The basic positioning drive for single axis applications The flexible, modular applied drive system for demanding drive tasks The drive solution for demanding high power single motor drives The scalable drive system for basic and demanding applications 380 to 690 V 3 ph. AC 0.15 to 5,000 HP (0.12 to 4,500 kW) 380 to 690 V 3 ph. AC 100 to 1,250 HP (75 to 1,200 kW) 85 to 950 V 3 ph. AC 5 to 24,000 HP (4 kW to 18 MW) High performance applications in all industries, including coordinated multi-motor drive systems and very high power single drives, motion control (positioning, synchronization). High performance, fully regenerative standalone drive applications requiring clean power (low harmonics, controllable power factor) Industrial applications in metals, plastics, printing, paper, cranes, mining, oil and gas, for new installations and retrofits. •Machine tools •Production machines: •Presses •Converting applications •Handling equipment •Paper machines •Rolling mills •Marine applications •Test bays •Centrifuges •Elevators and cranes •Cross cutters and shears •Downhill conveyor belts •Presses •Cable winches •Rolling mills •Cross cutters and shears •Wire-drawing machines •Extruders and kneaders •Presses •Elevators and cranes •Cableways and lifts •Mine hoists •Scalable ratings, functionality, number of axes, performance •Easy commissioning, auto-configuration •Innovative system architecture •Wide range of motors •Optimum interaction with SIMOTION, SIMATIC and SINUMERIK •Safety Integrated •Flexible and modular •Choice of rectifier types •Fully scalable - ratings, functionality, number of axes, performance •Auto-configuration •Wide range of motors •Optimum interaction with SIMOTION, SIMATIC and SINUMERIK • Safety Integrated •Air or liquid cooled •Ready to connect and run •High control accuracy and dynamic response •Low harmonics, exceeding IEEE 519 requirements •Tolerant of line voltage fluctuations •Reactive power compensation option •Safety Integrated • Choice of Control Units •Integrated field power supply •Free function blocks and Drive Control Chart •Expandable functionality using SINAMICS components •Single-phase connection possible Catalog D31 Catalogs PM21, D21.3, D21.7 Catalog D21.3 Catalog D23.1 Typical ratings 380 to 480 V 3 ph. AC 0.15 to 125 HP (0.12 to 90 kW) Main applications Machine and plants in the industrial environment, where machine axes should be quickly and precisely positioned in the simplest possible way. Application examples •Handling equipment •Assembly machines •Laboratory automation •Metalworking, ceramics, glass, woodworking, printing machines •Plastics processing machines Highlights 1/4 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Introduction The SINAMICS drives family SINAMICS medium voltage drives SINAMICS GM150 SINAMICS SM150 SINAMICS GL150 SINAMICS SL150 The universal drive solution for single motor drives The drive solution for demanding single and multimotor drives The drive solution for synchronous motors at high power ratings The drive solution for low speed motors with the highest torques and overloads 3.3 kV 3 ph. AC 5,000 to 24,000 HP (4 to 17.5 MW) Up to 12 kV 3 ph. AC up to 100,000 HP (up to 75 MW) 1 to 4 kV 3 ph. AC 3,000 to 36,000 HP (2.2 to 27 MW) High performance and multi motor applications in metals and mining High power and high speed applications in the process industries, especially in oil and gas and petrochemicals High power and low speed applications especially in the metals and mining sectors •Hot and cold rolling stands •Mine hoists •Test stand drives •Downhill and cross country conveyor belts •Compressors •Pumps and fans •Extruders and kneaders •Marine drives •Blast furnace blowers • Hot rolling mill roughing stands •Mine hoists •Ore and cement mills •Excavators •Space-saving •Easy, quick commissioning •Ready to connect and run enclosed drive •Optimum interaction with SIMATIC •Air and liquid cooled versions •Four quadrant (regenerative) operation as standard •High degree of efficiency and operation that reduces stress on the motor •High control accuracy and dynamic response •Almost no line harmonics •Reactive power compensation option •Easy, quick commissioning •Ready to connect and run enclosed drive •Optimum interaction with SIMATIC •Air and liquid cooled versions •Compact design and high power density •Simple operator control and monitoring •Extremely rugged, reliable in operation and almost maintenance free •Two directions of rotation by reversing the rotating field •Can be seamlessly integrated into higher level automation systems •Air and liquid cooled versions • Low output frequency for low speed motors •High short-time overload capability •Four-quadrant operation as standard •Extremely rugged, reliable in operation and almost maintenance free •High efficiency •Can be seamlessly integrated into higher level automation systems •Air and liquid cooled versions Catalog D12 Catalog D12 — — Typical ratings 2.3 to 4.16 kV 3 ph. AC 1,200 to 11,500 HP (1 to 8.5 MW) Main applications General purpose applications in the process industries Application examples •Pumps and fans •Compressors •Extruders and mixers •Grinding mills •Marine drives Highlights Siemens D21.7 – 2013 1/5 1 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules 1 Introduction The SINAMICS S120 range Drives for single axis applications Drives for multi axis applications Blocksize format Chassis format Booksize format Chassis format Cabinet Modules Catalog PM 21 Catalogs D21.3 and PM21 Catalog PM 21 Catalogs D21.3 and PM21 This Catalog and D21.3 SINAMICS S120 is the modular drive system with vector and servo control that is ideal for demanding drive tasks in plant and machine construction. Multi-axis drive solutions with higher-level motion control can be implemented with the modular SINAMICS S120 system just the same as solutions for single-axis drives. Covering a power range from 0.12 kW to 4500 kW and various control modules with a graduated range of functions, the modular SINAMICS S120 system can be used to simply and quickly create a precisely tailored drive configuration – for almost any demanding drive application. On the SINAMICS S120, the drive intelligence is combined with closed-loop control functions into Control Units. These units are capable of controlling drives in the vector, servo and V/Hz modes. They also perform the speed and torque control functions plus other intelligent drive functions for all axes. Using the available closed-loop control techniques, both synchronous as well as induction motors can be operated, and therefore the complete range of low-voltage motors from Siemens. Integrated PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET interfaces are available. These interfaces ensure easy integration into complete automation solutions. SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules are available in an enclosed version. Individual enclosed modules can be combined to form drive lineups with including the full range of SINAMICS S120 power ratings. Standardized interfaces enable the modules to be linked quickly to create a ready-to-connect drive solution for multi-motor applications. Benefits Applications SINAMICS S120 is characterized by the following properties: For high-performance single and multi-axis applications Versatile and flexible Wide range of power ratings Wide range of functions, including Safety Integrated Supports various cooling types (air/liquid-cooled) Supports various infeed concepts Can be simply integrated into higher-level automation and IT environments User-friendly engineering Ease of handling Simple installation Practical connection system SINAMICS S120 vector control is recommended for drive solutions with continuous material webs, for example, wire-drawing machines, film and paper machines, as well as for hoisting gear, centrifuges and test stand drives. 1/6 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 Servo control with SINAMICS S120 is employed for cyclic processes with both precise and highly dynamic closed-loop position control. With SINAMICS S120, more performance is integrated into machines that are used in many sectors, such as: Packaging, Textile, Printing and paper machines Presses and punches Machines used in the woodworking, glass and ceramics industries Hoisting gear and cranes Handling and assembly systems Machine tools Rolling mill drives A broad range of test stand applications SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules System Overview 5 2 2/2 Overview of SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules 2/3 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules – A Global Product SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module designs to NEMA vs to IEC standards 2/4 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules – NEMA/UL version Overview of voltage and power ratings 2/4 UL listing of a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module line-up 2/5 System configuration guidelines Selection and basic configuration of Cabinet Modules Arranging modules in a line-up Specifying the DC bus Transport sections Options applicable to the line-up Documentation and integration engineering 2/7 System design considerations 2/7 Benefits Siemens D 21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules System overview Overview of SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules All drive components are arranged in a clear, compact layout in the individual Cabinet Modules. They offer great flexibility for the configuration of drive line-ups, and a comprehensive array of options allows the systems to be optimally adapted for specific project, site, environmental, application and performance requirements. 2 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules is a modular system to configure enclosed drive line-ups with a central line infeed (rectifier) and common DC bus supplying power to multiple motor modules (inverters). SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module line-ups are typically used for either multi motor drive systems such as for paper machines, rolling mills, certain test stands and cranes, or for very high HP single drives. This makes it an ideal supplement to SINAMICS G150 and SINAMICS S150 stand-alone enclosed drives. SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules are based on the SINAMICS S120 range of components. Chassis format power modules for line and motor modules are housed in individual cabinets. Also available are booksize motor modules, with several booksize module kits mounted in a booksize base cabinet. As standard, a line-up comprises cabinet modules installed side-by-side in a row. Other configurations (for example, back-to-back) are available on request. The main components of the system are: • Line Connection Modules with line side components such as circuit breakers, fuses, and when required, contactors and line reactors. • Line Modules for the following variations of line infeed: - Basic Line Modules for two-quadrant (nonregenerative) operation - Smart Line Modules for four-quadrant (fully regenerative) operation - Active Line Modules for four-quadrant (fully regenerative) clean power operation, with negligible line harmonics and unity or adjustable power factor. • The following types of Motor Modules: - Chassis format (in individual cabinets) - Booksize kits (mounted in booksize base cabinets) • Control units • Auxiliary Power Supply Modules to supply accessories such as blowers and for AC and DC control power. • Various methods of dynamic braking with external resistors are possible: - Braking units mounted inside chassis - Configuring motor modules as braking modules - Central braking modules Standardized power and control interfaces facilitate easy configuration, installation and integration with the plant. Pre-manufactured connections are provided for interconnecting the DC bus and auxiliary power between cabinet modules. Communication between power modules and control units is done via DRIVE-CLiQ, the flexible backplane bus. = = = ~ ~ ~ = = ~ ~ = = ~ = = ~ ~ = ~ ~ G_D211_XX_00203 ~ = M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ Example of a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module line-up for a multi motor drive system 2/2 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules System overview SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules – A Global Product SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules (S120 CM) is a global product. However, regional differences in regulations, standards, specifications and voltage levels for power and control require modifications to the packaging (enclosure) and auxiliary components. SINAMICS S120 CM enclosed drive line-ups are therefore offered in versions designed to IEC (European) as well as to NEMA (North American) standards. SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module designs to NEMA vs. to IEC standards All models of SINAMICS S120 CM (NEMA or IEC) use the identical basic drive and electronics components – power modules of a particular power and voltage rating, CU320-2 control units, CompactFlash cards with firmware, and optional modules of the SINAMICS S120 range (including for example, SMC30 encoder interface, VSM10 voltage sensing module, CBE20 Ethernet communications module). Also, the cabinet dimensions and basic layouts are mostly the same for both versions. Differences between the NEMA and IEC versions are found in the configuration of the base units, i.e. the enclosure version and the scope of auxiliary equipment included (specifically line side disconnects and short circuit protection), as well as the offered range of standard and custom options. Cabinet Modules to IEC and NEMA standards have different order numbers, to ensure consistency in the mechanical and electrical interfaces and documentation for a system to the respective standards. Below is an overview of some of the more significant differences between NEMA and IEC versions (not a complete list!). SINAMICS S120 CM NEMA version SINAMICS S120 CM IEC version Voltage ranges • Up to 600 V with UL listing (690 V without UL) • Up to 690 V Base unit configuration • Circuit breaker disconnect per NEC/UL for motor branch circuit protection • Use of UL listed or recognized components (including busbar and wiring) • SCCR up to 100 kA per UL508A • EMC filter Category C3 for 2nd environment (industrial) per IEC 61800-3 • Disconnect and short circuit protection per IEC standards • Components and wiring per IEC standards • EMC filter Category C3 for 2nd environment (industrial) per IEC 61800-3 Enclosure options Base: IP20 (no roof – air discharge upwards) • NEMA 1 with raised roof (equivalent to IP21) • NEMA 1 filtered with louvers and dust filters (equivalent to IP23) – min. required for UL listing • IP43 as for IEC unit • NEMA 12 (ventilated) – louvers and fine air filters (equivalent to IP54) Base: IP20 (no roof – air discharge upwards) • IP21 (with raised roof) • IP23 (with top hat, louvers and dust filters) • IP43 (like IP23, plus 1mm mesh screen) • IP54 (like IP23, plus fine air filters) Exclusive standard options Only for NEMA version: •UL/cUL listing of the complete line-up per UL508A Only for IEC version: • EMC filter Category C2 for 1st environment (residential) per IEC 61800-3 Types of dynamic braking units • Braking units mounted inside chassis •Motor modules as central braking units (Central braking modules are not available with UL listing) • Braking units mounted inside chassis • Motor modules as central braking units • Central braking modules Documentation languages • Standard English/Spanish • Option English/French • Standard English/German • Option English and either French, Spanish or Italian Siemens D21.7 – 2013 2/3 2 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules System overview SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules – NEMA/UL version The following table provides an overview of the voltage ranges and power ratings of the SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules that are available for the NEMA/UL version: 2 Cabinet Module type Input current Line voltage 380 …. 480 V 3 ph. AC Line Connection Modules 250 … 3,000 A Basic Line Modules 365 … 1,630 A Smart Line Modules 463 … 1,430 A Active Line Modules 210 … 1,405 A Motor Modules Booksize – Motor Modules Chassis – Line voltage 500 …. 600 V 3 ph. AC Line Connection Modules 280 … 3,000 A Basic Line Modules 260 … 1,580 A Smart Line Modules 463 … 1,430 A Active Line Modules 210 … 1,405 A Motor Modules Booksize – Motor Modules Chassis – Line voltage 380 …. 600 V 3 ph. AC Auxiliary Power Supply 125 ... 250 A modules 1) Higher – 300 … 1,880 A 550 … 1,700 A 644 … 1,422 A – 102 … 1,524 A Output current Power range 1) kW @ 460 V – – – 250 … 1,000 kW – 300 … 900 kW – 150 … 1,000 kW 9 ... 132 A 4.8 ... 82 kW 210 … 1,405 A 125 … 900 kW kW @ 575 V – – – 200 … 1,250 kW – 400 … 1,200 kW – 450 … 1,150 kW – – 85 … 1,270 A 70 … 1,000 kW HP @ 460 V – – – – 5 ... 100 HP 150 … 1,150 HP HP @ 575 V – – – – – 100 … 1,250 HP – – – DC bus voltage DC bus current – 510 … 650 V 510 … 650 V 540 … 720 V 510 … 720 V 510 … 720 V – 420 … 1,880 A 550 … 1,700 A 235 … 1,574 A 11 ... 158 A 252 … 1,686 A – 675 … 810 V 675 … 810 V 710 … 900 V – 675 … 900 V – – power ratings can be achieved by connecting up to four identical line modules or motor modules in parallel. Note regarding 690 V AC: The components used in Cabinet Modules for a line voltage of 500 - 600 V are rated for 690 V per IEC standards (this includes the NEMA versions with an order number ending in “U3”). However, operation of these units at nominal line voltages >600 V (DC bus voltage >900V) invalidates their UL listing. UL Listing of a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module line-up SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules (NEMA version) can optionally be UL listed per UL508A, where the entire line-up is listed as one enclosed industrial control panel. UL listing of a line-up therefore requires all cabinet modules in the line-up to be compliant with UL508A. Every cabinet module therefore needs to be specified with option code: n U90 (UL listing per UL508A) or n U91 (cUL listing per UL508A for Canada) In addition, UL508A requires as a minimum a NEMA 1 enclosure, plus all ventilation openings to be fitted with air filters. Therefore, all cabinets need to be specified with option code: n M23 (NEMA 1 filtered, IP23) as minimum Also acceptable are options n M43 (IP43) and n M54 (NEMA 12 ventilated, IP54) Furthermore, for the factory to apply a UL listing mark to the Cabinet Module line-up (being the enclosed industrial control panel per UL508A) it is a prerequisite that Integration Engineering be ordered for the line-up (refer to page 5/8). This provides a comprehensive set of drawings and documentation for the line-up including all electrical and mechanical interconnections and wiring. 2/4 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 The short circuit current rating (SCCR) for the line-up is determined by all components including the line side components as well as Motor Modules. On the line side, the SCCR is determined by the Line Connection Module together with its associated Line Module(s). Refer to the Line Connection Module section (page 3/4) for SCCR. Some Line Connection Modules are available with a high SCCR of 84 kA or 100 kA, with option L70. SCCR values apply only to the combination of Line Connection Module with the Basic, Smart or Active Line Module per the table “Assignment of Line Modules to Line Connection Modules” on page 3/5. Auxiliary Power Supply Modules and options (braking units, output filters) are listed for an SCCR of up to 100 kA when included in a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module line-up. The SCCR of the line-up is additionally dependent on the SCCR of the smallest Motor Module it contains. The maximum value of the SCCR is determined by the power rating of any Motor Modules as follows. Motor Module(s) <600 HP: Motor Module(s) <900 HP: Maximum SCCR 65 kA Maximum SCCR 84 kA SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules System overview System configuration guidelines SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules is a modular system, where individual Cabinet Modules are combined into an enclosed drive line-up. The system provides a great deal of flexibility and together with a large variety of options allows an almost infinite number of possible permutations. To ensure that the end result is a fully functioning system in accordance with requirements, various aspects need to be considered in the selection and configuration of individual cabinet modules, and when specifying how these are to be combined into a line-up. Selection and basic configuration of cabinet modules n Motor Modules draw power from or generate power to the DC bus, and supply variable voltage and frequency to one or more motors. They are selected based on motor ratings and overloads, application specific duty cycles etc. Motor Modules are available in two formats: - Chassis format, with each chassis in its own cabinet. - Booksize format, where Booksize Base Cabinets contain a number of booksize module kits. n Line Modules feed power to the DC bus. They are selected based on the power to be drawn from or regenerated into the supply system. - Basic Line Modules for motoring only. - Smart or Active Line Modules if power regeneration back to the line is necessary. - The overall power balance must be considered, for example, some motors may be motoring while others are regenerating. The energy would be exchanged on the DC bus and not necessarily back to the line, so the line module is often not sized to provide the sum of the motor module ratings. Only excess power is regenerated back to the line. - If the ratio of power regenerated to the line is small compared to the motoring power drawn from the line, special configurations such as a mix of Basic and Smart Line Modules may be appropriate. (Consult factory). n Braking units for dynamic braking dissipate excess DC bus power in braking resistors. They may be needed: - Either as an alternative to regeneration to the line - Or, in some applications such as downhill conveyors, in addition to regeneration to allow electrical braking in the event of a power failure. n Line Connection Modules connect Line Modules to the AC power supply, and contain at a minimum, the main circuit breaker disconnect and usually the semiconductor fuses as required for the short circuit current rating (SSCR) of the line-up. They are selected and configured to match the chosen Line Modules. This requires close attention to ensure that the correct AC bus interconnections and necessary components are provided. - Basic and Smart Line Modules generally require specific line reactors, active line modules do not. - Certain Line Modules (depending on type and rating) require a contactor or a main circuit breaker to bridge (bypass) the pre-charge circuit, and to switch the line module on line after completion of precharge. n Auxiliary Power Supply Modules supply auxiliary and control power to the line-up, for example 3-phase and single phase AC power for the power module blowers, contactor coils and motorized circuit breakers, and 24 VDC to power control units and other electronics. Auxiliary power terminal blocks are provided in each cabinet module, with a pre-manufactured cable looping auxiliary power from one cabinet module to the next. - The Auxiliary Power Supply Module is selected based on the total power requirement of the line-up. - For small line-ups, auxiliary power supplies can be provided in the Line Connection Module (options K70 or K76). - It is also possible to provide auxiliary power from external sources. This is the default – auxiliary power will be provided internally only if specified! Arranging Cabinet Modules in a line-up After the Cabinet Modules are selected, they need to be arranged in a line-up, normally in a straight line next to each other. Such a line-up can be mounted against a wall (Cabinet Modules require front access only). Custom configurations (such as back-to-back) can also be offered. DC bus connections for back-to-back arrangements can be made at the end of a line-up or in the middle, in some instances without requiring any additional cabinet. Various issues need to be considered when determining the layout of the line-up: n A Line Module is always positioned adjacent to and on the right hand side of its associated single Line Connection Module (when looking at the front of the lineup). Line Connection Modules for parallel connection have the associated Line Modules on either side. n Line Modules are often positioned towards the center of the line-up. This provides for half the total DC bus power to be fed in each direction (and therefore half the DC bus cross-section), in contrast to the DC bus having to carry full current if the Line Module is at one end of a line-up. n The largest Motor Modules should preferably be closest to the Line Module. This may allow the DC bus size to be reduced further down the line-up where less power is required. n Motor Modules that feed pairs of motors where one is motoring while the other is regenerating (e.g. winders/unwinders or some test stands) should preferably be positioned adjacent to each other, to minimize the DC bus current elsewhere in the line-up. n Braking Modules should be positioned as close as possible to the motor module(s) regenerating the most power. n For process, plant layout or cabling design reasons, there may be a preference to position certain drives in a sequence, or at least adjacent to each other in groups. Such preferences may need to be balanced against the considerations listed above, in order to obtain the best technical and most cost effective solution. The positioning of Cabinet Modules in a line-up is therefore often an iterative process. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 2/5 2 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules System overview System configuration guidelines 2 Specifying the DC bus for each Cabinet Module Cabinet Module options applicable to a whole line-up Once the arrangement of Cabinet Modules is known, and with a thorough understanding of the DC current demand (motoring or generating) of the various Motor Modules based on the process to be controlled, the required DC bus current rating can be determined for each cabinet module. n The DC bus rating is a mandatory option for all Line and Motor Modules. n For Line Connection and Auxiliary Power Supply Modules a DC bus is optional. If these modules are positioned at the end of a line-up they may not need a DC bus. However, if there are Motor and/or Line Modules to either side, then a DC bus may be needed. n The DC bus is available in different widths (60, 80 or 100 mm) and dependant on current rating with either a single busbar per pole, or two or three busbars in parallel. - Only busbars of the same width can be interconnected. Therefore all DC bus in a line-up must be of the same width. - For reduced DC bus current ratings along a line-up, it is possible to change from say three parallel busbars down to two, and then down to a single one. n For the interconnection of the DC bus from one cabinet (or section of a line-up) to an adjacent one, standard bus transition pieces are provided. These are permanently mounted. During installation the transition pieces slide into the next bus section and only need to be tightened. With each Cabinet Module being specified individually, it is necessary to ensure that they are all compatible and can be combined in one line-up. Examples of options applicable to all modules in a line up include: n Enclosure type (NEMA 1, NEMA 1 filtered, NEMA 12). n Cabinet base (plinth): All Cabinet Modules must have the same overall height. n UL or cUL listing – the complete line-up is either UL listed per UL 508A or not. It is not possible to have only some of the Cabinet Modules UL listed, but others not. n Documentation format and languages should be the same for all modules. Documentation options can be specified for each Cabinet Module individually, or for the line-up as a whole (refer to following paragraph). Combining Cabinet Modules into transport sections Each Cabinet Module is specified individually. It is possible for each Cabinet Module to also be shipped individually, each one on its own pallet, each with its own piece of DC bus as specified per the option codes. n It is important to note that even if Cabinet Modules are shipped individually, they need to be installed in the arrangement as per the specified line-up design. This is especially the case if the DC bus rating varies along the line-up. But there are usually also other components (such as DRIVE-CLiQ cables) that were selected based on a specific configuration. It is, however, more common to combine Cabinet Modules into transport sections: n Two or more Cabinet Modules are bolted together on a common pallet, and are fitted with a common transport beam. The maximum width of each transport section is 2,400 mm (approx. 8 ft). Transport sections are specified by option Y11, with a code to specify the position of a Cabinet Module within the line-up. n Normally, the DC bus for each transport section is provided as a solid bus running its entire length. - This minimizes the number of bolted connections, simplifying installation and maintenance. - A consequence of this is that it is not possible to change the position of individual Cabinet Modules within a line-up at a later stage. n Auxiliary power connections between cabinets in one transport section are automatically done in the factory. 2/6 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 Documentation and Integration Engineering Included with each individual Cabinet Module is a set of drawings and documentation (in electronic format (pdf), shipped on a CD with the Cabinet Module). As a default there is, however, no documentation for the complete line-up showing interconnections between Cabinet Modules. The reason is that the factory cannot deduce how the various Cabinet Modules are intended to function, based on the individual part numbers. For example, there may be a number of Motor Modules with only some including a control unit, which could be connected in many different ways. One control unit could be used to control a number of power modules, each for a different motor or some power modules could be intended for parallel connection. And there is no way to tell which control unit is to be connected to which power module(s). “Integration Engineering” to integrate the individual Cabinet Modules into one functioning line-up can be provided, based on a detailed customer specification. This includes: n Documentation for the line-up as a whole, with all internal interconnections required for a functioning system. n Provision of all the interconnections such as DRIVE-CLiQ cables and other wiring to achieve the specified functionality. Integration Engineering can be ordered using separate part numbers. Documentation option codes (dxf format, advance (submittal) copies etc.) can be added to the order no. for integration engineering for the line-up as a whole, instead of being added to the order no. for each individual Cabinet Module. Note that in this context “Integration Engineering” is limited only to integrating individual Cabinet Modules into a line-up. This is not to be confused with integration of the drive lineup into the customer’s plant and interconnection to external equipment such as power supplies, motors and process control or automation equipment, which is outside the scope of supply of a Cabinet Module line-up! SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules System overview System design considerations SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules have been designed to offer the highest possible level of operational reliability. n EMC measures have been rigorously implemented to ensure trouble free operation of high speed digital control and communication systems in close proximity to high power switching devices. n With the help of air flow and temperature simulations, partitions have been designed to act as air baffles and heat sinks. n Special measures used in the construction of the cabinets ensure that they remain mechanically durable over their entire life cycle. n Attention has been paid to providing a wide range of cable routing options and special design concepts are applied consistently to broaden the scope of application and simplify servicing. n The units are supplied complete with all the necessary connections and connecting elements. Thanks to their carefully considered configuration concept, cabinets are shipped in a ready-to-connect state or, in the case of multiple transport sections, have been prepared for quick assembly. The selection you make is supported by an extensive range of options, harmonized and coordinated to various applications. The design of replaceable components is based on the principle that they must be quick and easy to change. In addition, the “Spares-On-Web” Internet tool makes it easy to view the spare parts that are available for the particular order. All components, from individual parts to the ready-to-connect cabinet, undergo rigorous testing throughout the entire production process. This guarantees a high level of functional reliability during installation and commissioning, as well as operation. Benefits The outstanding system features of the SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules provide the following advantages: n Pre-designed, type tested system: - Configuration of standard catalog product minimizes engineering. - Type tested, robust design provides guaranteed performance in industrial environments. n High level of reliability and availability: - Power modules with high ratings minimize component count and maximize reliability. - Individual modules and power components can be replaced quickly and easily, which ensures a higher level of plant availability. n Process optimization with minimal effort: - A standard PROFIBUS or PROFINET interface and various analog and digital interfaces enable easy integration into automation solutions. - Vector control fulfills the most exacting requirements regarding the accuracy and dynamic response of drives. n Energy savings during operation: - The inverters on the motor side are coupled through a common DC bus which allows energy exchange between motors that are motoring and generating. In this way, energy is saved, the line infeed is relieved and line harmonics reduced. - Generally the line infeed is only dimensioned for the maximum energy or the maximum current drawn when motoring – and not the sum of the energy ratings of all Motor Modules connected to the DC bus. - As a consequence, for example, for winders/unwinders or transmission test stands with Motor Modules that are motoring and generating, a significantly smaller line infeed unit can be selected. n Cost minimization during operation, maintenance, and service: - Simple commissioning with the menu-driven STARTER commissioning tool. - Optional, menu-navigated AOP30 advanced operator panel with plain text display and bar-type display of process values. - All components are easily accessible, which makes them extremely service friendly. n Space-saving design - Optimized component layouts result in smallest possible footprint. n Environmentally friendly operation: - The drives are exceptionally quiet and compact due to the use of state-of-the-art IGBT power semiconductors and an innovative cooling concept that ensures a long lifetime. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 2/7 2 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Notes System overview 2 2/8 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules 5 Line Modules 3/2 Overview of Line Modules Line Connection Modules Basic Line Modules Smart Line Modules Active Line Modules 3/3 Line Connection Modules Overview Design Selection and ordering data Block diagram Technical data Options 3/13 Basic Line Modules Overview Design Selection and ordering data Block diagram Technical data Options 3/21 Smart Line Modules Overview Design Selection and ordering data Block diagram Technical data Options 3/29 Active Line Modules with Active Interface Modules Overview Design Selection and ordering data Block diagram Technical data Options Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Line Module Overview Overview of Line Modules 3 Line Modules are the link between the 3-phase supply system and the common DC bus, and comprise: n Line Connection Module: The Line Connection Module contains the disconnect device and short circuit protection (a circuit breaker plus fuses as required for SCCR), and when required additional components such as, for example, a contactor, line reactor and optionally AC and DC control power supplies. The Line Connection Module feeds 3-phase power to the line side converter – the Basic, Smart or Active Line Module. n Basic Line Module: A Basic Line Module is a basic diode (or thyristor) 6-pulse bridge rectifier that rectifies the incoming AC power to feed the DC bus. A Basic Line Module is non-regenerative, meaning the power flow is always from the line supply system to the DC bus, it cannot feed power from the DC bus back into the line. Up to four Basic Line Modules can be connected in parallel, or configured to provide 12-, 18- or 24-pulse rectifiers in combination with a phase shifting drive isolation transformer. n Smart Line Module: A Smart Line Module is a fully regenerative IGBT bridge that is capable of feeding power in both directions, from the line to the DC bus, or from the DC bus back to the line, at 100% of its rated current. Unlike older designs using thyristor bridges to feed power back to the line, the Smart Line Module does not require an autotransformer and there is no danger of inverter failure – the IGBTs will safely turn off in the event of a power failure during regeneration without damage or blowing any fuses. Up to four Smart Line Modules can be connected in parallel, or configured to provide 12-, 18- or 24-pulse rectifiers in combination with a phase shifting drive isolation transformer. For line-ups requiring only a small amount of regeneration compared to the power drawn from the supply for motoring, it is also possible to have a mix of Basic Line Modules and Smart Line Modules feeding a DC bus. This requires some engineering to ensure that each unit will carry the correct amount of current (please consult factory). n Active Line Module: An Active Line Module is also a fully regenerative IGBT bridge that is capable of feeding power in both directions, but offers a number of unique features over and above a Smart Line Module. This includes very low harmonics (clean power), unity or adjustable power factor, and a controlled DC bus voltage that is held stable even with fluctuations in the supply voltage which provides a number of benefits explained elsewhere (refer to section on Active Line Modules). In the SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module system, an Active Line Module is always supplied as a unit together with its Active Interface Module, which includes the clean power filter and pre-charge circuitry. Common DC Bus DC power Line Connection Module Basic, or Smart Active Line Module AC line supply Basic power flow in a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module line-up 3/2 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 Motor Module Motor Module AC to motor Motor Module SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Line Connection Modules Line Connection Modules – Overview In some designs with motorized circuit breaker the DC bus must be precharged before the main circuit breaker can be closed. Interlocking circuitry for start-up sequencing is included. The circuit breaker should never be closed directly by bypassing the interlocks. Line Connection Module with option L43 for Basic Line Module For Basic Line Modules, the Line Connection Module includes a line reactor as standard. If there is sufficient impedance on the line side (for example, when using a dedicated drive isolation transformer) the line reactor can be excluded (option L22). This option is not available for parallel Basic Line Modules connected to a single Line Connection Module, as line reactors are required to ensure current sharing. - Q1 M - L1 U1 L1 The Line Connection Module contains the disconnect device and short circuit protection (a circuit breaker plus fuses as required for SCCR), and when required additional components such as, for example, a contactor, line reactor and optionally AC and DC control power supplies. The Line Connection Module feeds 3-phase power to the line side converter – the Basic, Smart or Active Line Module. Line Connection Modules are available for the following voltages and currents: Line voltage Rated input current 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC 250 … 3,000 A 500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC 280 … 3,000 A Design Different versions exist depending on the rated input current: •Units ≤ 800 A include a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) •Units > 800 A include a fixed mounted insulated case circuit breaker (motorized power circuit breaker). Optionally, a draw-out circuit breaker can be supplied. All Line Connection Modules additionally include semiconductor fuses as required for the high SCCR rating of power modules. When Line Connection Modules are ordered, the type of Line Module used must be specified: •for Basic Line Module: Option L43 • for Smart Line Module: Option L44 • for Active Line Module: Option L42 L2 V1 L3 W1 Example of a Line Connection Module for a Basic Line Module For most Basic Line Module ratings, the precharge function is included within the Basic Line Module itself. For the largest (1880 A DC) Basic Line Module, the precharge circuitry is provided in the Line Connection Module. An input isolation contactor is available for Line Connection Modules ≤ 800 A (with MCCB), by specifying option L13. Line Connection Module with option L44 for Smart Line Module For Smart Line Modules, the Line Connection Module always includes the power supply for the precharge circuit. For Line Connection Modules ≤ 800 A (with MCCB) an input contactor is standard, to bridge (bypass) the precharge circuit after the DC bus is charged. For Line Connector Modules >800 A, the motorized circuit breaker is used for this function. When provided, the line reactor is always included in the Smart Line Module cabinet. - Q1 M L1 U1 L2 V1 L3 W1 Example of a Line Connection Module for a Smart Line Module Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/3 3 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Line Connection Modules 3 Design (continued) Selection and ordering data Line Connection Module with option L42 for Active Line Module Line Connection Module For Active Line Modules, the Line Connection Module connects to the Active Interface Module. For the smaller Active Interface Module (frame sizes FI/FX and GI/GX), the Active Interface Module includes the precharge circuitry and the associated precharge and bridging contactors. For larger sizes the Line Connection Module includes the power supply for the precharge circuit. For Line Connection Modules ≤ 800 A (with MCCB), an input contactor is standard, to bridge the precharge circuit. For Line Connection Modules >800 A, the motorized circuit breaker is used for this function. - Q10 K4_2_1 K4_4_1 K4_6_1 - Q1 - K1 U1 L1 L2 V1 L3 W1 Example of a Line Connection Module for Active Line Modules <800A - Q10 K4_2_1 K4_4_1 K4_6_1 K4_2_2 - Q1 M L1 K4_4_2 K4_6_2 U1_1 L2 V1_1 L3 W1_1 U1_2 V1_2 Rated input current SCCR standard* A kA Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC 6SL3700-0LE32-5AU3 65 250 6SL3700-0LE34-0AU3 65 380 6SL3700-0LE36-3AU3 65 600 6SL3700-0LE38-0AU3 65 770 6SL3700-0LE41-0AU3 65 1000 6SL3700-0LE41-3AU3 65 1250 6SL3700-0LE41-6AU3 65 1600 6SL3700-0LE42-0AU3 65 2000 6SL3700-0LE42-0BU3 65 2000 6SL3700-0LE42-5BU3 100 2500 6SL3700-0LE43-2BU3 100 3000 Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC 25 6SL3700-0LG32-8AU3 280 6SL3700-0LG34-0AU3 25 380 6SL3700-0LG36-3AU3 25 600 35 6SL3700-0LG38-0AU3 770 85 6SL3700-0LG41-0AU3 1000 85 6SL3700-0LG41-3AU3 1250 85 6SL3700-0LG41-6AU3 1600 6SL3700-0LG42-0BU3 85 2000 6SL3700-0LG42-5BU3 85 2500 6SL3700-0LG43-2BU3 85 3000 SCCR high* (option L70) kA — — — — 84 84 100 100 84 — — — — — — 100 100 100 100 100 100 Short circuit current ratings (SCCR) provided above are per UL508A supplement SB for Line Connection Modules in combination with Line Modules as listed in the table on the following page. The standard SCCR applies to the base part number. For Line Connection Modules rated 1,000 A and up, a high SCCR is optionally available by specifying option code L70. W1_2 Example of a Line Connection Module for Active Line Modules in parallel connection Order numbers and option codes When ordering a drive with options, add -Z to the order number followed by option codes separated by a “+” sign. Example: 6SL3700-0LE32-5AU3-Z L43+M90+… • SINAMICS S120 CM is a standard product, defined by its order no. and option codes. • ”Y” options (+Y..) require additional text to describe the option. For example: Y09 Special enclosure color RAL 1018 (traffic yellow) 3/4 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 * Note: The SCCR of the line-up is additionally dependent on the SCCR of the smallest Motor Module it contains. The maximum value of the SCCR is determined by the power rating of any Motor Modules as follows. Motor Module(s) <600 HP: Maximum SCCR 65 kA Motor Module(s) <900 HP: Maximum SCCR 84 kA When ordering a Line Connection Module it is essential to specify the option code for the type of Line Module that it is connected to, to ensure that it is correctly configured for its intended use. This applies particularly to interconnecting busbars, and power supplies for precharge circuits. • Option L43 for a Basic Line Module • Option L44 for a Smart Line Module • Option L42 for an Active Line Module SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Line Connection Modules Assignment of Line Modules to Line Connection Modules The table below shows the assignment of Basic, Smart or Active Line Modules to Line Connection Modules. These are the only available combinations. These combinations were evaluated by UL, and components are selected in compliance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code NFPA70. Line Connection Module Basic Line Module Rated Rated input input current Current A A Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC 250 6SL3700-0LE32-5AU3 – 380 6SL3700-0LE34-0AU3 – 600 6SL3700-0LE36-3AU3 365 460 770 6SL3700-0LE38-0AU3 710 1000 6SL3700-0LE41-0AU3 – 1250 6SL3700-0LE41-3AU3 1010 1600 6SL3700-0LE41-6AU3 1265 Active Line Module Rated input current A Rated input current A 3 – – 463 – 614 883 1093 1430 – – 6SL3730-6TE35-5AU3 – 6SL3730-6TE37-3AU3 6SL3730-6TE41-1AU3 6SL3730-6TE41-3AU3 6SL3730-6TE41-7AU3 210 260 380 490 605 840 985 1405 6SL3730-7TE32-1AU3 6SL3730-7TE32-6AU3 6SL3730-7TE33-8AU3 6SL3730-7TE35-0AU3 6SL3730-7TE36-1AU3 6SL3730-7TE38-4AU3 6SL3730-7TE41-0AU3 6SL3730-7TE41-4AU3 6SL3730-1TE41-8AU3 6SL3730-1TE41-2AU3 6SL3730-1TE41-2CU3 2500 6SL3700-0LE42-5BU3 2 × 1170 6SL3730-1TE41-5AU3 6SL3730-1TE41-5CU3 3000 6SL3700-0LE43-2BU3 2 × 1500 6SL3730-1TE41-8AU3 6SL3730-1TE41-8CU3 Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC 280 6SL3700-0LG32-8AU3 260 6SL3730-1TG33-0AU3 380 6SL3700-0LG34-0AU3 375 6SL3730-1TG34-3AU3 600 6SL3700-0LG36-3AU3 575 6SL3730-1TG36-8AU3 770 6SL3700-0LG38-0AU3 – – 1000 6SL3700-0LG41-0AU3 925 6SL3730-1TG41-1AU3 1250 6SL3700-0LG41-3AU3 1180 6SL3730-1TG41-4AU3 – 2 × 817 – 6SL3730-6TE41-1BU3 6SL3730-6TE41-1CU3 6SL3730-6TE41-3BU3 6SL3730-6TE41-3CU3 6SL3730-6TE41-7BU3 6SL3730-6TE41-7CU3 – 2 × 936 – 6SL3730-7TE41-0AU3 6SL3730-7TE41-0CU3 – 2 × 1335 6SL3730-7TE41-4AU3 6SL3730-7TE41-4CU3 – – 463 757 – 1009 – – 6SL3730-6TG35-5AU3 6SL3730-6TG38-8AU3 – 6SL3730-6TG41-2AU3 – – 575 735 – 1025 1600 2000 1430 2 × 700 6SL3730-6TG41-7AU3 6SL3730-6TG38-8BU3 6SL3730-6TG38-8CU3 6SL3730-6TG41-2BU3 6SL3730-6TG41-2CU3 – 1270 2 × 698 2000 2000 6SL3700-0LE42-0AU3 6SL3700-0LE42-0BU3 6SL3700-0LG41-6AU3 6SL3700-0LG42-0BU3 1630 2 × 935 1580 2 × 855 – 2500 6SL3700-0LG42-5BU3 3000 6SL3700-0LG43-2BU3 – – 6SL3730-1TE34-2AU3 6SL3730-1TE35-3AU3 6SL3730-1TE38-2AU3 – 6SL3730-1TE41-2AU3 6SL3730-1TE41-5AU3 Smart Line Module 2 × 1092 6SL3730-1TG41-8AU3 6SL3730-1TG41-1AU3 6SL3730-1TG41-1CU3 – 6SL3730-1TG41-4AU3 6SL3730-1TG41-4CU3 2 × 1462 6SL3730-1TG41-8AU3 6SL3730-1TG41-8CU3 2 × 1011 2 × 1323 2 × 934 – 2 × 1323 6SL3730-6TG41-7BU3 6SL3730-6TG41-7CU3 – – – 6SL3730-7TG35-8AU3 6SL3730-7TG37-4AU3 – 6SL3730-7TG41-0AU3 6SL3730-7TG41-3AU3 6SL3730-7TG37-4AU3 6SL3730-7TG37-4CU3 2 × 974 6SL3730-7TG41-0AU3 6SL3730-7TG41-0CU3 2 × 1206 6SL3730-7TG41-3AU3 6SL3730-7TG41-3CU3 – – Entries in italics: Parallel connection of two Line Modules with a single Line Connection Module: The current derating factors as listed below are already included in the current values listed above: • 7.5% for Basic Line Modules • 7.5% for Smart Line Modules • 5% for Active Line Modules Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/5 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Line Connection Modules Technical data Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC Line Current • Rated current INE 3 Current Demand • 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 230 V 2 ph. AC • 230 V 2 ph. AC (Opt. L43 BLM)1) 2) - Making current - Holding current Power loss, max. 3) at 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V] - Option L42 ALM / L44 SLM - Option L43 BLM Cooling air requirement (L43 BLM) 1) Sound pressure level LpA (1m) at 60 [50] Hz (Option L43 BLM) 1) Line supply connection L1, L2, L3 • Conductor size, max. Ground (PE) connection • Conductor size, max. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) In combination with Line module • Standard • High (option L70) Enclosure (base design) Enclosure dimensions, nominal • Width • Height 4) • Depth Weight, approx. - Option L42 ALM / L44 SLM - Option L43 BLM lb [kg] Frame size Line Connection Module 6SL37006SL37000LE32-5AU3 0LE34-0AU3 6SL37000LE36-3AU3 6SL37000LE38-0AU3 6SL37000LE41-0AU3 6SL37000LE41-3AU3 A 250 380 600 770 1,000 1,250 A A – – – – – – – – – 1.07 – 1.07 A A 3.6 0.04 3.6 0.04 3.6 0.04 10.8 0.12 0.5 0.06 0.5 0.06 kW 0.115 [0.115] 0.19 [0.19] kW – – cfm [m3/s] – – 0.31 [0.31] 0.39 [0.39] 0.675 [0.675] 0.74 [0.74] – – 0.18 [0.18] – 763 [0.36] 0.29 [0.29] 0.787 [0.787] 763 [0.36] dB(A) – – – – 70 [68] 70 [68] 2x250 MCM 2x250 MCM 2x600 MCM 3x500 MCM 8x 500 MCM 8x 500 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM 65 – IP20 65 – IP20 65 – IP20 65 – IP20 65 84 IP20 65 84 IP20 inch [mm] 24 [600] inch [mm] 87 [2,200] inch [mm] 24 [600] 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 460 [210] – FL 510 [230] – FL 680 [310] 790 [360] GL 750 [340] 930 [420] HL 990 [450] – JL 1,040 [470] 1,260 [570] JL kA kA lb [kg] lb [kg] 1) With option L43 (for Basic Line Module) only. 2)Current demand of contactors/circuit breakers and fans with NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43, or NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. 3) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. 4)The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA (IP54) enclosure. 3/6 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 12 ventilated SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Line Connection Modules Technical data Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC Line Current • Rated current I N E Current Demand • 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 230 V 2 ph. AC • 230 V 2 ph. AC (Opt. L43 BLM)1) 2) - Making current - Holding current Power loss, max. 3) at 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V] - Option L42 ALM / L44 SLM - Option L43 BLM Cooling air requirement (L43 BLM) 1) Sound pressure level LpA (1m) at 60 [50] Hz (Option L43 BLM) 1) Line supply connection L1, L2, L3 • Conductor size, max. Line Connection Module 6SL3700- 6SL37000LE41-6AU3 0LE42-0AU3 A 1,600 2,000 2,000 2,500 3,000 A A – 1.07 – 2.14 – 2.14 – 2.14 – 2.14 A A 0.5 0.06 0.5 0.06 0.5 0.06 0.5 0.06 0.5 0.06 kW kW cfm [m3/s] 0.41 [0.41] 1.186 [1.186] 763 [0.36] 0.60 [0.60] 1.366 [1.366] 1,526 [0.72] 0.60 [0.60] 1.594 [1.594] 1,526 [0.72] 0.95 [0.95] 2.502 [2,502] 1,526 [0.72] 0.95 [0.95] 2.482[2,482] 1,526 [0.72] dB(A) 70 [68] 72 [70] 72 [70] 72 [70] 72 [70] 10x 500 MCM 10x 500 MCM 10x 500 MCM 10x 500 MCM 10x 600 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM kA kA 65 100 IP20 65 100 IP20 65 84 IP20 100 – IP20 100 – IP20 inch [mm] inch [mm] inch [mm] 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 39.4 [1,000] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 39.4 [1,000] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 39.4 [1,000] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] lb [kg] lb [kg] 1,040 [470] 1,480 [670] JL 1,080 [490] 1,500 [680] JL 1,360 [600] 2,160 [980] KL 1,370 [620] 2,200 [1,000] KL 1,590 [720] 2,380 [1,080] LL Ground (PE) connection • Conductor size, max. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) In combination with Line module • Standard • High (option L70) Enclosure (base design) Enclosure dimensions, nominal • Width • Height 4) • Depth Weight, approx. - Option L42 ALM / L44 SLM - Option L43 BLM lb [kg] Frame size 6SL37006SL37006SL37000LE42-0BU3 0LE42-5BU3 0LE43-2BU3 For parallel connected line modules 3 With option L43 (for Basic Line Module) only. Current demand of contactors/circuit breakers and fans with NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43, or NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100% utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. 1) 2) 3) 4) Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/7 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Line Connection Modules Technical data Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V Line Current • Rated current I NE 3 Current Demand • 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 230 V 2 ph. AC • 230 V 2 ph. AC (Opt. L43 BLM)1) 2) - Making current - Holding current Power loss, max. 3) at 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V] - Option L42 ALM / L44 SLM - Option L43 BLM Cooling air requirement (L43 BLM) 1) Sound pressure level L pA (1m) at 60 [50] Hz (Option L43 BLM) 1) Line supply connection L1, L2, L3 • Conductor size, max. Ground (PE) connection • Conductor size, max. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) In combination with Line module • Standard • High (option L70) Enclosure (base design) Enclosure dimensions, nominal • Width • Height 4) • Depth Weight, approx. - Option L42 ALM / L44 SLM - Option L43 BLM Frame size Line Connection Module 6SL37006SL37000LG32-8AU3 0LG34-0AU3 6SL37000LG36-3AU3 6SL37000LG38-0AU3 6SL37000LG41-0AU3 A 280 380 600 770 1,000 A A – – – – – – – – – 1.07 A A 3.6 0.04 3.6 0.04 3.6 0.04 10.8 0.20 0.5 0.06 kW 0.125 [0.125] kW 0.402 [0.402] cfm [m3/s] – 0.19 [0.19] 0.668 [0.668] – 0.31 [0.31] 0.794 [0.794] – 0.39 [0.39] – – 0.18 [0.18] 0.963 [0.963] 763 [0.36] dB(A) – – – – 70 [68] 2X 250 MCM 2X 250 MCM 2x 600 MCM 3x 500 MCM 8x 500 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM 25 – IP20 25 – IP20 25 – IP20 35 – IP20 85 100 IP20 inch [mm] 24 [600] inch [mm] 87 [2,200] inch [mm] 24 [600] 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] lb [kg] lb [kg] 510 [230] 680 [310] FL 680 [310] 880 [400] GL 750 [340] – HL 990 [450] 1,430 [650] JL kA kA 490 [220] 570 [260] FL With option L43 (for Basic Line Module) only. Current demand of contactors/circuit breakers and fans with NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43, or NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. 1) 2) 3) 4) 3/8 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Line Connection Modules Technical data Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V Line Current • Rated current I N E Current Demand • 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 230 V 2 ph. AC • 230 V 2 ph. AC (Opt. L43 BLM)1) 2) - Making current - Holding current Power loss, max. 3) at 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V] - Option L42 ALM / L44 SLM - Option L43 BLM Cooling air requirement (L43 BLM) 1) Sound pressure level L pA (1m) at 60 [50] Hz (Option L43 BLM) 1) Line supply connection L1, L2, L3 • Conductor size, max. Ground (PE) connection • Conductor size, max. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) In combination with Line module • Standard • High (option L70) Enclosure (base design) Enclosure dimensions, nominal • Width • Height 4) • Depth Weight, approx. - Option L42 ALM / L44 SLM - Option L43 BLM lb [kg] Frame size Line Connection Module 6SL37006SL37000LG41-3AU3 0LG41-6AU3 6SL37006SL37006SL37000LG42-0BU3 0LG42-5BU3 0LG43-2BU3 For parallel connected line modules A 1,250 1,600 2,000 2,500 3,000 A A – 1.07 – 1.07 – 2.14 – 2.14 – 2.14 A A 0.5 0.06 0.5 0.06 0.5 0.06 0.5 0.06 0.5 0.06 0.41 [0.41] 1.387 [1.387] 763 [0.36] 0.60 [0.60] 2.166 [2.166] 1,526 [0.72] 0.95 [0.95] 2.166 [2.166] 1,526 [0.72] 0.95 [0.95] 2.894 [2.894] 1,526 [0.72] 70 [68] 70 [68] 72 [70] 72 [70] 72 [70] 8x 500 MCM 8x 500 MCM 10x 500 MCM 10x 500 MCM 10x 600 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM 500 MCM kA kA 85 100 IP20 85 100 IP20 85 100 IP20 85 100 IP20 85 100 IP20 inch [mm] inch [mm] inch [mm] 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 39.4 [1,000] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 39.4 [1,000] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 39.4 [1,000] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] lb [kg] 1,040 [470] 1,480 [670] JL 1,080 [490] 1,500 [680] JL 1,320 [600] 2,160 [980] KL 1,370 [620] 2,200 [1,000] KL 1,590 [720] 2,380 [1,080] LL kW 0.29 [0.29] kW 1.073[1.073] cfm [m3/s] 763 [0.36] dB(A) 3 With option L43 (for Basic Line Module) only. Current demand of contactors/circuit breakers and fans with NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43, or NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. 1) 2) 3) 4) Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/9 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Line Connection Modules Options The table below lists the available options for Line Connection Modules (refer to Description of the Options for details). Option code ≤ 800A Available Options 3 TM150 Terminal Module for temperature monitoring (qty. 1) G51 TM150 Terminal Modules for temperature monitoring (qty. 2) G52 TM150 Terminal Modules for temperature monitoring (qty. 3) G53 TM150 Terminal Modules for temperature monitoring (qty. 4) G54 Power supply for blowers, mounted in Line Connection Module K70 Auxiliary power supplies, mounted in Line Connection Module K76 Input contactor (only for ≤ 800A) L13 Without input line reactor (only for L43 Basic Line Module) L22 Surge Protection for ungrounded (IT) power supply L21 Draw-out circuit breaker L25 Current transformer upstream of circuit breaker L41 Line Connection Module for Active Line Modules L42 Line Connection Module for Basic Line Modules L43 Line Connection Module for Smart Line Modules L44 EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton installed in the cabinet door L45 Enclosure space heater L55 High SCCR (short circuit current rating) 84 or 100 kA L70 Insulation Monitor for ungrounded supplies L87 Base (plinth) 100mm M06 Base (plinth) 200mm (cable marshalling space) M07 M21 Enclosure NEMA 1 (IP21) Enclosure NEMA 1 filtered (IP23) [includes M60] M23 M27 Side panel (left) Enclosure IP43 [includes M60] M43 Enclosure NEMA 12 (ventilated) (IP54) [includes M60] M54 Solid cabinet door (no ventilation openings, air inlet through floor) Additional touch protection [included in M23, M43 and M54] M59 M60 EMC shield busbar M70 DC busbar system (Id = 1,170 A, 1x 60 x 10 mm) M80 DC busbar system (Id = 1,500 A, 1x 80 x 10 mm) M81 DC busbar system (Id = 1,840 A, 1x 100 x 10 mm) M82 DC busbar system (Id = 2,150 A, 2x 60 x 10 mm) M83 DC busbar system (Id = 2,730 A, 2x 80 x 10 mm) M84 DC busbar system (Id = 3,320 A, 2x 100 x 10 mm) M85 DC busbar system (Id = 3,720 A, 3x 80 x 10 mm) M86 DC busbar system (Id = 4,480 A, 3x 100 x 10 mm) M87 Lifting beam/eye bolts M90 P10 Input power meter [includes L41] Input power meter with PROFIBUS [includes L41] P11 UL listing per UL508A [requires M23, M43 or M54] U90 cUL listing per UL508A for Canada Special enclosure paint color [requires M23, M43 or M54 plus T58] [specify color] Assembly into transport sections [specify sections] Y11 1-line label for customer text, 40 x 80 mm [specify text] Y31 2-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text] Y32 4-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text] Y33 3/10 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 U91 Y09 Rated current 800…2,000A ≥ 2,000 A – – – – – SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Line Connection Modules Options Option code D02 Available Options (continued) Customer drawings in DXF format Advance copy of customer documentation in PDF format D14 Documentation English/French D58 Nameplate English/French T58 Visual Inspection by customer F03 Witnessed or observed function test without motor F71 Witnessed or observed test incl. high-voltage and insulation test F77 Customer specific test (on request) F97 ≤ 800A Rated current 800…2,000A ≥ 2,000 A 3 Option combination matrix for Line Connection Modules The following tables provide an overview of possible and impermissible combinations of standard options. Please refer to the descriptions of options for more information. Custom configurations may be possible to provide combinations not available as standard – please contact the factory. Combination is possible – Combination is not possible Electrical Options K70 K70 K76 K76 L13 L22 L25 L41 L42 L43 L44 P10 P11 – – – – L13 – L22 – L25 – – L41 L42 – – L43 – L44 – – P10 – P11 – – – – Mechanical Options M06 M06 M07 M07 M21 M23 M43 M54 M59 M60 – – – – – – – – M90 Y11 U90 U91 – – – – – – M21 M23 – M43 – – M54 – – – – – – M59 M60 – M90 – Y11 – U90 – – U91 – – – – Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/11 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Line Connection Modules Options DC busbar system Options Within a line-up, all DC bus needs to be of the same width (60, 80 or 100 mm). DC bus current ratings may vary within a line-up by using either a single busbar, or two or three busbars in parallel per pole. The following table indicates which busbar options for the various cabinet modules may be combined within a line-up. Combination is possible – Combination is not possible 3 M80 M81 M82 – – M80 M81 – M82 – – – – M83 M84 – M85 – M86 – M87 – M83 – – – Y31 Y32 – Y31 Y33 – Y32 – – Y33 – 3/12 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – M87 – – – – Label Options M86 – – – – M85 – – – – M84 – – SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Basic Line Modules Overview Basic Line Modules are available for the following voltages and currents. Power ratings can be increased by connecting up to four identical Basic Line Modules in parallel. Line voltage Rated power 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC 200 … 1,000 kW 500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC 200 (250) … 1,250 (1,500) kW A Basic Line Module is a 6-pulse rectifier bridge. For low harmonic feedback it is possible to configure multiple Basic Line Modules in 12-, 18- or 24-pulse configurations in combination with phase shifting transformers. Alternatively, line harmonics filters are available to reduce harmonics. Basic Line Modules are compact line infeeds that supply power from the AC supply to the DC bus – power regeneration from the DC bus back to the line is not possible. They are used when energy does not need to be fed back into the supply network. For Basic Line Modules, the Line Connection Module includes a line reactor as standard. If there is sufficient impedance on the line side (for example, when using a dedicated drive isolation transformer) the line reactor can be excluded (option L22). This option is not available for parallel Basic Line Modules connected to a single Line Connection Module, as line reactors are required to ensure current sharing. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. If any of the loads in the line-up regenerate more power than can be absorbed by other loads, braking modules with resistors are required to convert the excess energy into heat. Design Basic Line Modules are available in different frame sizes. With frame sizes FB and GB, a fully controlled thyristor bridge is used to pre-charge the DC bus (Basic Line Modules and connected Motor Modules). During operation, the thyristors are fired with a trigger delay angle of 0°. Parallel connection of Basic Line Modules to increase the power rating Basic Line Modules, frame size GD for 900 kW (480 V) or 1,300 kW (600 V) use a diode bridge, and the DC bus is precharged via a separate line side precharge circuit located in the Line Connection Module (option L43, Line Connection Module for Basic Line Module). Two Basic Line Modules supplied with power via two separate Line Connection Modules With this arrangement, each Basic Line Module is supplied by a Line Connection Module, each of which includes a circuit breaker disconnect and fuses. Basic Line Modules with their associated Line Connection Modules may be located anywhere in the line-up. There are two alternative arrangements for connecting Line Modules in parallel to obtain drive line-ups with a higher power rating. Note that for a line-up with multiple disconnects special lock out/tag out procedures may be required on site. Common DC Bus Motor Module Motor Module Line Connection Module Basic Line Module Motor Module 6SL37301T...-.AU3 AC to motor AC Line Supply Line Connection Module Basic Line Module Motor Module Motor Module External Braking Resistor 6SL37301T...-.AU3 AC to motor AC Line Supply Braking Module AC to motor Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/13 3 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Basic Line Modules Design Two Basic Line Modules supplied with power via a single Line Connection Module In the alternative arrangement, two Basic Line Modules can be connected to the left and right of a single Line Connection Module, which results in a very compact design for the line infeed. The power connections on the Basic Line Module on the left of the Line Connection Module are a mirror image of the standard unit mounted to its right. The Basic Line Module to the left has an order no. ending in CU3, example: 6SL3730-1T…-.CU3. The Line Connection Module for parallel connection includes a single circuit breaker with two sets of line fuses, for selective individual protection of each line module. 3 Common DC Bus Motor Module Motor Module Motor Module Basic Line Module Line Connection Module 6SL37301T...-.CU3 1T... AC to motor AC to motor Basic Line Module Motor Module Motor Module External Braking Resistor 6SL37301T...-.AU3 AC line supply Note: Please note that only Basic Line Modules with exactly the same output rating may be connected in parallel. Due to the possibility of unequal current sharing the rated current of the Basic Line Modules must be derated by 7.5%. Braking Module AC to motor Basic Line Modules connected in parallel are operated on a common control unit, the required DRIVE-CLiQ cables need to be considered. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. Selection and ordering guide Rated power at 460 (400) V Note for parallel connection Mounting relative to Line Connection Module Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 510 … 650 V DC) 250 (200) – 300 (250) – – 450 (400) 630 (560) – Left 800 (710) – Left 1,000 (900) – Left kW 3/14 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 Basic Line Module Rated power at 575 (690) V Order No. kW 6SL3730-1TE34-2AU3 6SL3730-1TE35-3AU3 6SL3730-1TE38-2AU3 6SL3730-1TE41-2AU3 6SL3730-1TE41-2CU3 6SL3730-1TE41-5AU3 6SL3730-1TE41-5CU3 6SL3730-1TE41-8AU3 6SL3730-1TE41-8CU3 Note for parallel connection Basic Line Module Mounting relative Order No. to Line Connection Module Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 675 … 810 (930) V DC) 6SL3730-1TG33-0AU3 200 (250) – 6SL3730-1TG34-3AU3 – 300 (355) 6SL3730-1TG36-8AU3 450 (560) – 6SL3730-1TG41-1AU3 750 (900) – 6SL3730-1TG41-1CU3 Left 6SL3730-1TG41-4AU3 900 (1,100) – 6SL3730-1TG41-4CU3 Left 6SL3730-1TG41-8AU3 1,200 (1,500) – 6SL3730-1TG41-8CU3 Left SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Basic Line Modules Block diagram Cabinet Module DC busbar Cabinet Module Supply infeed L1 L2 L3 Connection to next auxiliary power supply = = Internal power supply Activation of bypass contactor +Temp -Temp EP +24 V EP M 1 U1 -X1 V1 W1 PE -X42 1 2 3 4 3 ~ -F10 -F11 P24L P24L M M DCPA DCNA DCP DCN = DC fuses Option N52 internal Fan READY DC LINK POWER OK IPD Card G_D213_EN_00057c -X41 4 3 2 1 P24 V M LEDs Line Connection Module (Option L43) -X9 1 2 3 4 5 6 X402 DRIVE-CLiQ socket 2 Basic Line Module DRIVE-CLiQ socket 1 DRIVE-CLiQ socket 0 X400 X401 Connection example of a Basic Line Module Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/15 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Basic Line Modules Technical data Line Voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC 3 6SL37301TE34-2AU3 6SL37301TE35-3AU3 6SL37301TE38-2AU3 6SL37301TE41-2AU3 6SL37301TE41-2CU3 6SL37301TE41-5AU3 6SL37301TE41-5CU3 6SL37301TE41-8AU3 6SL37301TE41-8CU3 250 200 200 160 300 250 250 200 450 400 355 315 630 560 500 450 800 710 630 560 1,000 900 800 705 420 530 820 1,200 1,500 1,880 328 413 640 936 1,170 1,467 630 795 1,230 1,800 2,250 2,820 A A 365 460 710 1,010 1,265 1,630 547 690 1,065 1,515 1,897 2,380 A A 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal 7,200 9,600 14,600 23,200 29,000 34,800 57,600 76,800 116,800 185,600 232,000 139,200 1.9 [1.9] kW cfm [m3/s] 360 [0.17] 2.1 [2.1] 3.2 [3.2] 4.6 [4.6] 5.5 [5.5] 6.9 [6.9] 360 [0.17] 360 [0.17] 763 [0.36] 763 [0.36] 763 [0.36] dB(A) 68 [66] 68 [66] 68 [66] 73 [71] 73 [71] 73 [71] ft [m] ft [m] 8,500 [2,600] 8,500 [2,600] 8,500 [2,600] 13,100 [4,000] 13,100 [4,000] 15,750 [4,800] 12,800 [3,900] 2,800 [3,900] 12,800 [3,900] 19,700 [6,000] 19,700 [6,000] 23,600 [7,200] IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 16 [400] 16 [400] 16 [400] 16 [400] 16 [400] 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 87 [2,200] 87[2,200] 87 [2,200] 87 [2,200] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 24 [600] 24 [600] 24 [600] 24 [600] 24 [600] 366 [166] 366 [166] 366 [166] 705 [320] 705 [320] 705 [320] FB FB FB GB GB GD For parallel connection, mounted to the left of the Line Connection Module Rated power kW • For I N DC (60 Hz, 460 V) kW • For I N DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW • For I H DC (60 Hz, 460 V) • For I H DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW DC bus current A • Rated current I NDC • Base load current I H DC 1) A • Maximum current I max DC A Input current • Rated current I NE • Maximum current I max E Current demand • 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 460 (400) V AC 2) DC bus capacitance • Basic Line Module • Drive line-up, max. Power loss, max. 3) • At 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V] Cooling air requirement Sound pressure level LpA (1m) at 60 [50] Hz Output cable length, max. 4) • Shielded • Unshielded Enclosure (base design) Enclosure dimensions, nominal • Width • Height 5) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size Basic Line Module F F inch [mm] inch [mm] inch [mm] lb [kg] IP20 1) The base load current I H DC is the basis for a duty cycle of duration 300 s with an overload of 150% x I H DC for 60 s, or I max DC for 5 s. 2) The current demand for the 460 (400) V AC auxiliary power supply is drawn from the line input voltage. 3) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. 4) Sum of lengths of all motor cables and DC bus. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request. 5) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA ventilated (IP54) enclosure. 3/16 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Basic Line Modules Technical data Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V For parallel connection, mounted to the left of the Line Connection Module Rated power kW • For I N DC (60 Hz, 575 V) • For I N DC (50 Hz, 690 V) kW kW • For I H DC (60 Hz, 575 V) • For I H DC (50 Hz, 690 V) kW DC bus current A • Rated current IN DC • Base load current I H DC 1) A • Maximum current I max DC A Input current • Rated current I N E • Maximum current I max E A A Current demand • 24V DC auxiliary power supply A • 575 (690) V AC 2) A DC bus capacitance F • Basic Line Module • Drive line-up, max. F Power loss, max.3) • At 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 690V] kW Cooling air requirement cfm [m3/s] Sound pressure level L pA (1m) dB(A) at 60 [50] Hz Basic Line Module 6SL37301TG33-0AU3 6SL37301TG34-3AU3 6SL37301TG36-8AU3 6SL37301TG41-1AU3 6SL37301TG41-1CU3 6SL37301TG41-4AU3 6SL37301TG41-4CU3 6SL37301TG41-8AU3 6SL37301TG41-8CU3 200 300 450 750 900 1,250 250 355 560 900 1,100 1.500 150 250 355 600 750 1,000 195 280 440 710 910 1,220 300 430 680 1,100 1,400 1,880 234 335 530 858 1,092 1,467 450 645 1,020 1,650 2,100 2,820 260 375 575 925 1,180 1,580 390 563 863 1,388 1,770 2,370 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal 3,200 4,800 7,300 11,600 15,470 19,500 25,600 38,400 58,400 92,800 123,760 78,000 3 1.5 [1.5] 2.1 [2.1] 3.0 [3.0] 5.4 [5.4] 5.8 [5.8] 7.3 [7.3] 360 [0.17] 360 [0.17] 360 [0.17] 763 [0.36] 763 [0.36] 763 [0.36] 68 [66] 68 [66] 68 [66] 73 [71] 73 [71] 73 [71] 4,900 [1,500] 4,900 [1,500] 4,900 [1,500] 7,400 [2,250] 7,400 [2,250] 9,000 [2,750] 7,400 [2,250] 7,400 [2,250] 7,400 [2,250] 11,000 [3,375] 11,000 [3,375] 13,500 [4,125] IP20 IP20 16 [400] 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 24 [600] 366 [166] 366 [166] FB FB Output cable length, max. 4) • Shielded • Unshielded ft [m] ft [m] Enclosure (base design) IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 16 [400] 16 [400] 16 [400] 16 [400] 87[2,200] 87 [2,200] 87 [2,200] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 24 [600] 24 [600] 24 [600] 366 [166] 705 [320] 705 [320] 705 [320] FB GB GB GD Enclosure dimensions, nominal • Width • Height 5) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size inch [mm] inch [mm] inch [mm] lb [kg] 1) The base load current I H DC is the basis for a duty cycle of duration 300 s with an overload of 150% x I H DC for 60 s, or I max DC for 5 s. 2) The current demand for the 575 (690) V AC auxiliary power supply is drawn from the line input voltage. 3) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100% utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. 4) Sum of lengths of all motor cables and DC bus. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request. 5) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/17 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Basic Line Modules Options The table below lists the available options for Basic Line Modules (refer to Description of the Options for details). Option code CBC10 Communication Board (CANbus) G20 1) Special enclosure paint color [specify color] Y09 CBE20 Communication Board (Ethernet) G33 1) Assembly into transport sections [specify sections] Y11 1-line label for customer text, 40 x 80 mm [specify text] Y31 Monitoring of precharge function 3 Option code Available Options AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel installed in the cabinet door CU320-2 DP Control Unit (PROFIBUS DP) G56 K08 1) 2-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text] Y32 K90 4-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text] Y33 Performance expansion for CU320-2 K94 1) CU320-2 PN Control Unit (PROFINET) K95 Enclosure space heater L55 25/125 kW braking unit (for frame size FB) for line voltages of 380 ... 480 V and 660 ... 690 V L61 50/250 kW braking unit (for frame size GB/GD) for line voltages of 380 ... 480 V and 660 ... 690 V L62 25/125 kW braking unit (for frame size FB) for line voltages of 500 ... 600 V L64 50/250 kW braking unit (for frame size GB/GD) for line voltages of 500 ... 600 V L65 Base (plinth) 100mm M06 Base (plinth) 200mm (cable marshalling space) M07 Enclosure NEMA 1 (IP21) M21 Enclosure NEMA 1 filtered (IP23) [includes M60] M23 Side panel (right) M26 Side panel (left) M27 Enclosure IP43 [includes M60] M43 Enclosure NEMA 12 (ventilated) (IP54) [includes M60] M54 Solid cabinet door (no ventilation openings, air inlet through floor) M59 Additional touch protection [included in M23, M43 & M54] M60 DC busbar system (Id = 1,170 A, 1x 60 x 10 mm) M80 DC busbar system (Id = 1,500 A, 1x 80 x 10 mm) M81 DC busbar system (Id = 1,840 A, 1x 100 x 10 mm) M82 DC busbar system (Id = 2,150 A, 2x 60 x 10 mm) M83 DC busbar system (Id = 2,730 A, 2x 80 x 10 mm) M84 DC busbar system (Id = 3,320 A, 2x 100 x 10 mm) M85 DC busbar system (Id = 3,720 A, 3x 80 x 10 mm) M86 DC busbar system (Id = 4,480 A, 3x 100 x 10 mm) M87 Lifting beam/eye bolts M90 UL listing per UL508A [requires M23, M43 or M54] U90 cUL listing per UL508A for Canada [requires M23, M43 or M54, plus T58] U91 1) Only in combination with options K90 or K95. 3/18 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 Available Options Customer drawings in dxf format D02 Advance copy of customer documentation (pdf) D14 Documentation English/French D58 Nameplate English/French T58 Visual Inspection by customer F03 Witnessed or observed function test without motor F71 Witnessed or observed test incl. high-voltage and insulation test F77 Customer specific test (on request) F97 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Basic Line Modules Options Option combination matrix for Basic Line Modules The following tables provide an overview of possible and impermissible combinations of standard options. Please refer to the descriptions of options for more information. Custom configurations may be possible to provide combinations not available as standard – please contact the factory. Combination is possible – Combination is not possible 3 Electrical Options G20 K08 K90 K94 K95 L61 L62 L64 L65 – – – – – – G20 G33 G33 – K08 – K90 K94 – K95 L61 L62 – L64 – – L65 – – – M59 M60 M90 – Mechanical Options M06 M07 M07 M21 M23 M43 M54 Y11 U90 U91 – – – – – M06 – – M21 – – – – – – – M23 – M43 – – M54 – – – – – – M59 M60 – – M90 – Y11 U90 – – U91 – – – – Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/19 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Basic Line Modules Options DC busbar system Options Within a line-up, all DC bus needs to be of the same width (60, 80 or 100 mm). DC bus current ratings may vary within a lineup by using either a single busbar, or two or three busbars in parallel per pole. The following table indicates which busbar options for the various cabinet modules may be combined within a line-up. Combination is possible – Combination is not possible 3 M80 M81 M82 – – M80 M81 – M82 – – – – M83 M84 – M85 – M86 – M87 – M83 – – – Y31 Y31 Y32 Y33 – – Y32 – Y33 – – 3/20 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – M87 – – – – Label Options M86 – – – – M85 – – – – M84 – – SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Smart Line Modules Overview The use of IGBTs makes Smart Line Modules immune to inverter commutation faults. Smart Line Modules are available for the following voltages and currents. Power ratings can be increased by connecting up to four identical SLM in parallel. Line voltage Rated power 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC 250 … 900 kW 500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC 400 (450) … 1,150 (1,400) kW 3 A Smart Line Module is a 6-pulse front end. For low harmonic feedback it is possible to configure multiple Smart Line Modules in 12-, 18- or 24-pulse configurations in combination with phase shifting transformers. Note that commercially available line harmonic filters are not suitable for use with Smart Line Modules. Smart Line Modules are uncontrolled rectifiers that supply power from the AC supply to the DC bus, and that are also capable of regenerating 100% continuous power from the DC bus back to the line. Regeneration can be deactivated with a digital input. For Smart Line Modules the Line Connection Module includes a 4% line reactor as standard. If there is sufficient impedance on the line side (for example, when using a dedicated drive isolation transformer) the line reactor can be excluded (option L22). This option is not available for parallel Smart Line Modules connected to a single Line Connection Module, as line reactors are required to ensure current sharing. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. Design Smart Line Modules are IGBT based inverters. When regenerating, the IGBTs are switched at the fundamental line frequency. Since this reduces switching losses, a high percentage of the power device current can be utilized. In rectifier mode the current flows through the freewheeling diodes of the IBGTs. The Smart Line Module thus behaves in a similar way to the Basic Line Module. If any of the loads in the line-up regenerate more power than can be absorbed by other loads, the DC bus voltage increases and the IGBTs are switched to feed the excess energy back into the supply system. The precharge circuitry is built into Smart Line Modules, and the Line Connection Module with option L44 (LCM for Smart Line Module) includes the power supply for the precharge circuit, as well as a contactor or motorized circuit breaker to bypass (bridge) the precharge circuit after precharging the DC bus capacitors. Braking Modules with associated braking resistors may be added. They would typically be needed only if it is necessary to brake the load in the event of a power supply failure. Parallel connection of Smart Line Modules to increase the power rating There are two alternative arrangements for connecting Smart Line Modules in parallel to obtain drive line-ups with a higher power rating, similar to the arrangements available for Basic Line Modules. Two Smart Line Modules supplied with power via two separate Line Connection Modules With this arrangement, each Smart Line Module is supplied by a Line Connection Module, which includes a circuit breaker disconnect and fuses. The Smart Line Module is always located to the right of the Line Connection Module, and has an order no. ending in “AU3”, example: 6SL37306T…-.AU3. Smart Line Modules with their associated Line Connection Modules may be located anywhere in the line-up. Note that for a line-up with multiple disconnects special lock out/tag out procedures may be required on site. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/21 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Smart Line Modules Design Two Smart Line Modules supplied with power via a single Line Connection Module In the alternative arrangement, two Smart Line Modules can be connected to the left and right of a single Line Connection Module, which results in a very compact design for the line infeed. The connections on the Smart Line Module on the left of the Line Connection Module are a mirror image of the standard unit mounted to its right. For a parallel connection, the Smart Line Module to the right has an order no. ending in “BU3”, while the one to the left has an order no. ending in “CU3.” The Line Connection Module for parallel connection includes a single circuit breaker with two sets of line fuses, for selective individual protection of each line module. 3 Common DC Bus Line Connection Module Smart Line Module Smart Line Module Motor Module 6SL37306T...-.AU3 6SL37306T...-.CU3 AC to motor AC line supply Smart Line Module Line Connection Module Motor Module Motor Module Motor Module 6SL37306T...-.BU3 AC line supply Note: Please note that only Smart Line Modules with exactly the same output rating may be connected in parallel. Due to the possibility of unequal current sharing the rated current of the Smart Line Modules must be derated by 7.5%. AC to motor AC to motor Smart Line Modules connected in parallel are operated on a common control unit, and the required DRIVE-CLiQ cables need to be considered. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. Selection and ordering data Rated power at 460 (400) V Note for parallel connection Smart Line Module Rated power at 575 (690) V Note for parallel connection Smart Line Module kW Mounting relative to Line Connection Module Order No. kW Mounting relative to Line Connection Module Order No. Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 510 … 650 V DC) Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 675 … 810 (930) V DC) 300 (250) – 6SL3730-6TE35-5AU3 400 (450) – 6SL3730-6TG35-5AU3 400 (355) – 6SL3730-6TE37-3AU3 630 (710) – 6SL3730-6TG38-8AU3 560 (500) – 6SL3730-6TE41-1AU3 Right 6SL3730-6TG38-8BU3 Right 6SL3730-6TE41-1BU3 Left 6SL3730-6TG38-8CU3 Left 6SL3730-6TE41-1CU3 – 6SL3730-6TG41-2AU3 – 6SL3730-6TE41-3AU3 Right 6SL3730-6TG41-2BU3 Right 6SL3730-6TE41-3BU3 Left 6SL3730-6TG41-2CU3 Left 6SL3730-6TE41-3CU3 – 6SL3730-6TG41-7AU3 – 6SL3730-6TE41-7AU3 Right 6SL3730-6TG41-7BU3 Right 6SL3730-6TE41-7BU3 Left 6SL3730-6TG41-7CU3 Left 6SL3730-6TE41-7CU3 710 (630) 900 (800) 3/22 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 800 (1,000) 1,200 (1,400) SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Smart Line Modules Block diagram Cabinet Module DC busbar -X9 1 2 Line Connection Module (Option L44) P24 V M 3 = Activation of bypass contactor 4 M 5 LED READY DRIVE-CLiQ socket Smart Line Module X500 DRIVE-CLiQ socket 2 Cabinet Module +Temp -Temp EP +24 V EP M1 DRIVE-CLiQ socket 0 -X41 4 3 2 1 DRIVE-CLiQ socket 1 X400 X401 X402 3 Voltage Sensing Module VSM10 = Internal power supply 6 7 LEDs Feedback pre-charching 8 L1 L2 READY DC LINK POWER OK L3 -F10 Supply infeed -X42 1 2 3 4 Line reactor L1 L2 L3 U1 V1 W1 PE -F11 P24L P24L M M Fan -F20 DCPA DCNA -F21 Fan1) ~ DCP DCN = IPD Card 380 - 480 V 1 ph AC or 500 - 690 V 1 ph AC -F24 -X100 1 2 3 4 5 6 Auxiliary power supply: Connection for Braking Module G_D213_EN_00058c 230 V AC 24 V DC 1) The number of fans depends on the frame size. Connection example of a Smart Line Module Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/23 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Smart Line Modules Technical data Line Voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC Smart Line Module 6SL37306TE35-5AU3 6SL37306TE37-3AU3 6SL37306TE41-1AU3 6SL37306TE41-1BU3 6SL37306TE41-1CU3 6SL37306TE41-3AU3 6SL37306TE41-3BU3 6SL37306TE41-3CU3 6SL37306TE41-7AU3 6SL37306TE41-7BU3 6SL37306TE41-7CU3 300 250 250 235 400 355 355 315 560 500 500 450 710 630 630 555 900 800 800 730 For parallel connection, mounted to the right of the Line Connection Module 3 For parallel connection, mounted to the left of the Line Connection Module Rated power kW • For I N DC (60 Hz, 460 V) • For I N DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW kW • For I H DC (60 Hz, 460 V) kW • For I H DC (50 Hz, 400 V) DC bus current • Rated current I N DC A 550 730 1,050 1,300 1,700 • Base load current I H DC 1) • Maximum current I max DC A A 490 825 650 1,095 934 1,575 1,157 1,950 1,513 2,550 A A 463 694 614 921 883 1,324 1,093 1,639 1,430 2,145 A A 1.35 1.8 1.35 1.8 1.4 3.6 1.5 5.4 1.7 5.4 F F 8,400 42,000 12,000 60,000 16,800 67,200 18,900 75,600 28,800 115,200 kW cfm [m3/s] 3.7 763 [0.36] 4.7 763 [0.36] 7.1 1,650 [0.78] 11.0 2,290 [1.08] 11.5 2,290 [1.08] dB(A) 73 [69] 73 [69] 73 [70] 73 [70] 73 [70] ft [m] ft [m] 13,100 [4,000] 19,700 [6,000] IP20 13,100 [4,000] 19,700 [6,000] IP20 15,750 [4,800] 23,600 [7,200] IP20 15,750 [4,800] 23,600 [7,200] IP20 15,750 [4,800] 23,600 [7,200] IP20 inch [mm] inch [mm] inch [mm] lb [kg] 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 600 [270] GX 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 600 [270] GX 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,080 [490] HX 31.5 [800] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,710 [775] JX 31.5 [800] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,710 [775] JX Input current • Rated current I N E • Maximum current I max E Current demand • 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 460 (400) V AC 2) DC bus capacitance • Smart Line Module • Drive line-up, max. Power loss, max.3) • At 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V] Cooling air requirement Sound pressure level LpA (1m) at 60 [50] Hz Output cable length, max. 4) • Shielded • Unshielded Enclosure (base design) Enclosure dimensions, nominal • Width • Height 5) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size 1) The base load current I H DC is the basis for a duty cycle of duration 300 s with an overload of 150% x I H DC for 60 s, or I max DC for 5 s. 2) The current demand for the 460 (400) V AC auxiliary power supply is drawn from the line input voltage. 3) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. 4) Sum of lengths of all motor cables and DC bus. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request.. 5) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA ventilated (IP54) enclosure. 3/24 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 12 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Smart Line Modules Technical data Line Voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V Smart Line Module 6SL37306TG35-5AU3 6SL37306TG38-8AU3 6SL3730- 6TG38-8BU3 6SL37306TG38-8CU3 6SL37306TG41-2AU3 6SL3730- 6TG41-2BU3 6SL3730- 6TG41-2CU3 6SL37306TG41-7AU3 6SL3730- 6TG41-7BU3 6SL3730- 6TG41-7CU3 400 450 350 405 630 710 560 665 800 1,000 710 885 1,200 1,400 1,000 1,255 A A A 550 490 825 900 800 1,350 1,200 1,068 1,800 1,700 1,513 2,550 A A 463 694 757 1,135 1,009 1,513 1,430 2,145 A A 1.35 1.2 [1.0] 1.4 2.5 [2.1] 1.5 3.7 [3.1] 1.7 3.7 [3.1] 5,600 28,000 7,400 29,600 11,100 44,400 14,400 57.600 6.5 1,650 [0.78] 12.0 2,290 [1.08] 13.8 2,290 [1.08] For parallel connection, mounted to the right of the Line Connection Module For parallel connection, mounted to the left of the Line Connection Module Rated power kW • For I N DC (60 Hz, 575 V) • For I N DC (50 Hz, 690 V) kW kW • For I HDC (60 Hz, 575 V) kW • For I HDC (50 Hz, 690 V) 3 DC bus current • Rated current I N DC • Base load current I H DC 1) • Maximum current I max DC Input current • Rated current I N E • Maximum current I max E Current demand • 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 575 (690) V AC 2) DC bus capacitance • Smart Line Module • Drive line-up, max. Power loss, max.3) • At 60 Hz 575V [50 Hz 690V] Cooling air requirement Sound pressure level L pA (1m) at 60 [50] Hz Output cable length, max. 4) • Shielded • Unshielded Enclosure (base design) Enclosure dimensions, nominal • Width • Height 5) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size F F kW 4.3 cfm [m3/s] 763 [0.36] dB(A) 73 [69] 73 [70] 73 [70] 73 [70] ft [m] ft [m] 7,400 [2,250] 11,000 [3,375] IP20 9,000 [2,750] 13,500 [4,125] IP20 9,000 [2,750] 13,500 [4,125] IP20 9,000 [2,750] 13,500 [4,125] IP20 inch [mm] inch [mm] inch [mm] lb [kg] 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 600 [270] GX 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,210 [550] HX 31.5 [800] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,750 [795] JX 31.5 [800] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,750 [795] JX 1) The base load current I H DC is the basis for a duty cycle of duration 300 s with an overload of 150% x I H DC for 60 s, or I max DC for 5 s. 2) The current demand for the 575 (690) V AC auxiliary power supply is drawn from the line input voltage. 3) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. 4) Sum of lengths of all motor cables and DC bus. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request.. 5) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21)and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/25 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Smart Line Modules Options The table below lists the available options for Smart Line Modules (refer to Description of the Options for details). 3 Available Options CBC10 Communication Board (CANbus) CBE20 Communication Board (Ethernet) Monitoring of precharge function AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel installed in the cabinet door CU320-2 DP Control Unit (PROFIBUS DP) Performance expansion for CU320-2 CU320-2 PN Control Unit (PROFINET) Without input line reactor Enclosure space heater 50/250 kW braking unit for line voltages of 380 ... 480 V and 660 ... 690 V 50/250 kW braking unit for line voltages of 500 ... 600 V Base (plinth) 100mm Base (plinth) 200mm (cable marshalling space) Enclosure NEMA 1 (IP21) Enclosure NEMA 1 filtered (IP23) [includes M60] Side panel (right) Side panel (left) Enclosure IP43 [includes M60] Enclosure NEMA 12 (ventilated) (IP54) [includes M60] Solid cabinet door (no ventilation openings, air inlet through floor) Additional touch protection [included in M23, M43 & M54] DC busbar system (Id = 1,170 A, 1x 60 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 1,500 A, 1x 80 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 1,840 A, 1x 100 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 2,150 A, 2x 60 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 2,730 A, 2x 80 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 3,320 A, 2x 100 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 3,720 A, 3x 80 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 4,480 A, 3x 100 x 10 mm) Lifting beam/eye bolts UL listing per UL508A [requires M23, M43 or M54] cUL listing per UL508A for Canada [requires M23, M43 or M54, plus T58] 1) Only in combination with options K90 or K95. 3/26 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 Option code G20 1) G33 1) G56 K08 1) K90 K94 1) K95 L22 L55 L62 L65 M06 M07 M21 M23 M26 M27 M43 M54 M59 M60 M80 M81 M82 M83 M84 M85 M86 M87 M90 U90 U91 Available Options Special enclosure paint color [specify color] Assembly into transport sections [specify sections] 1-line label for customer text, 40 x 80 mm [specify text] 2-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text] 4-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text] Customer drawings in dxf format Advance copy of customer documentation (pdf) Documentation English/French Nameplate English/French Visual Inspection by customer Witnessed or observed function test without motor Witnessed or observed test incl. high-voltage and insulation test Customer specific test (on request) Option code Y09 Y11 Y31 Y32 Y33 D02 D14 D58 T58 F03 F71 F77 F97 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Smart Line Modules Options Option combination matrix for Smart Line Modules The following tables provide an overview of possible and impermissible combinations of standard options. Please refer to the descriptions of options for more information. Custom configurations may be possible to provide combinations not available as standard – please contact the factory. Combination is possible – Combination is not possible 3 Electrical Options G20 G20 G33 G33 K08 K90 K94 K95 L22 L62 L65 – – K08 K90 – K94 K95 – L22 L62 – L65 – Mechanical Options M06 M07 M07 M21 M23 M43 M54 M59 M60 M90 Y11 U90 U91 – – – – – M06 – – M21 – – – – – – – M23 – M43 – – M54 – – – – – – M59 M60 – – M90 – Y11 U90 – – U91 – – – – Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/27 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Smart Line Modules Options DC busbar system Options Within a line-up, all DC bus needs to be of the same width (60, 80 or 100 mm). DC bus current ratings may vary within a lineup by using either a single busbar, or two or three busbars in parallel per pole. The following table indicates which busbar options for the various cabinet modules may be combined within a line-up. Combination is possible 3 – Combination is not possible M80 M81 M82 – – M80 M81 – M82 – – – – M83 M84 – M85 – M86 – M87 – M83 – – – Y31 Y31 Y32 Y33 – – Y32 – Y33 – – 3/28 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – M87 – – – – Label Options M86 – – – – M85 – – – – M84 – – SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Active Line Modules Overview In contrast to Basic Line Modules and Smart Line Modules, Active Line Modules control the DC bus voltage and keep it constant despite fluctuations in the line voltage (the line voltage must remain within the permissible tolerance range). Braking Modules with associated braking resistors may be added. They would typically be needed only if it is necessary to brake the load in the event of a power supply failure. Active Line Modules are available for the following voltages and currents. Power ratings can be increased by connecting up to four identical Active Line Modules in parallel. Active Line Modules are controlled rectifiers that supply power from the AC supply to the DC bus, and that are also capable of regenerating 100% continuous power from the DC bus back to the line. Line voltage Rated power 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC 132 … 1,000 kW 500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC 400 (560) … 1,150 (1,400) kW Active Line Modules draw a virtually sinusoidal current from the supply system with very low current harmonics that meet the requirements of IEEE 519-1992 at the drive input terminals. In addition, Active Line Modules allow the input power to be adjusted within the range of approx. 0.80 leading to 0.80 lagging (default setting is unity power factor). For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. Design Active Line Modules are always operated together with an Active Interface Module, which contains the associated Clean Power Filter and pre-charging circuit. The integrated line filter ensures compliance with the EMC requirements for the “second environment”. Parallel connection of Active Line Modules to increase the power rating The Active Line Module and Active Interface Module are supplied as a complete, fully wired unit, i.e., the customer does not need to supply any further cables or carry out any other wiring tasks. Two Active Line Modules supplied with power via two separate Line Connection Modules With this arrangement, each Active Line Module is supplied by a Line Connection Module, which includes a circuit breaker disconnect and fuses. The Active Line Module is always located to the right of the Line Connection Module, and has an order no. ending in “AU3”, example: 6SL37307T…-.AU3. The precharge circuitry is built into Active Line Modules, and the Line Connection Module with option L42 (for Active Line Module) may, depending on the power rating, include the power supply for the precharge circuit, as well as a contactor or motorized circuit breaker to bypass (bridge) the precharge circuit after precharging the DC bus capacitors. There are two alternative arrangements for connecting Active Line Modules in parallel to obtain drive line-ups with a higher power rating. Active Line Modules with their associated Line Connection Modules may be located anywhere in the line-up. Note that for a line-up with multiple disconnects special lock out/tag out procedures may be required on site. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/29 3 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Active Line Modules Design Two Active Line Modules supplied with power via a single Line Connection Module In the alternative arrangement, two Active Line Modules can be connected to the left and right of a single Line Connection Module, which results in a very compact design for the line infeed. The power connections on the Active Line Module on the left of the Line Connection Module are a mirror image of the standard unit mounted to its right. For a parallel connection, the Active Line Module to the left has an order no. ending in “CU3.” The Line Connection Module for parallel connection includes a single circuit breaker with two sets of line fuses, for selective individual protection of each line module. 3 Common DC Bus Line Connection Module Active Interface Module Active Line Module Motor Module 6SL3730-7T...-.AU3 AC line supply Active Line Module Active Interface Module Line Connection Module 6SL3730-7T...-.CU3 AC to motor Note: Please note that only Active Line Modules with exactly the same output rating may be connected in parallel. Due to the possibility of unequal current sharing the rated current of the Active Line Modules must be derated by 5%. Active Interface Module Active Line Module Motor Module Motor Module 6SL3730-7T...-.AU3 AC line supply AC to motor Active Line Modules connected in parallel are operated on a common control unit, and the required DRIVE-CLiQ cables need to be considered. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. Selection and ordering guide Rated power at 460 (400) V Note for parallel connection Active Line Module Rated power at 575 (690) V Mounting relative to Line Connection Module Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 540 … 720 V DC) – 150 (132) – 180 (160) – 270 (235) – 350 (300) – 450 (380) – 560 (500) – 710 (630) Left Order No. kW 1,000 (900) – 6SL3730-7TE41-4AU3 Left 6SL3730-7TE41-4CU3 kW 3/30 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6SL3730-7TE32-1AU3 6SL3730-7TE32-6AU3 6SL3730-7TE33-8AU3 6SL3730-7TE35-0AU3 6SL3730-7TE36-1AU3 6SL3730-7TE38-4AU3 6SL3730-7TE41-0AU3 6SL3730-7TE41-0CU3 Note for parallel connection Mounting relative to Line Connection Module Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 700 … 900 (1035) V DC) – 450 (560) – 630 (800) Left – 900 (1,100) Left – 1,200 (1,400) Left Active Line Module Order No. 6SL3730-7TG35-8AU3 6SL3730-7TG37-4AU3 6SL3730-7TG37-4CU3 6SL3730-7TG41-0AU3 6SL3730-7TG41-0CU3 6SL3730-7TG41-3AU3 6SL3730-7TG41-3CU3 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Active Line Modules Block diagram The Active Line Module is controlled by the CU320-2 Control Unit. Communication between the Control Unit and module is established via DRIVE-CLiQ connections. The Active Interface Module is included in the scope of delivery of the Active Line Module. Cabinet Module Cabinet Module DC busbar Cabinet Module 230 V AC Line Connection Module (Option L42) Supply infeed L1 L2 L3 U1 V1 W1 PE -X41 4 3 2 1 -F101 -F102 Fan 2 Bypass contactor 1 -X2 -X1 ≈ READY DC LINK POWER OK Internal -X9 power supply P24 V 1 = M 2 = 3 Activation of 4 bypass contactor 5 Activation of 6 precharging contactor 4 Precharging contactor +Temp -Temp EP + 24 V EP M1 U2 V2 W2 PE U1 V1 W1 PE -X1 DRIVE-CLiQ socket 2 Voltage Sensing Module VSM10 DRIVE-CLiQ socket 1 Active Line Module DRIVE-CLiQ socket 0 -X609 PE 1 P24 2 4 P24 3 M 4 M L 5 6 N7 8 9 1 10 11 2 12 13 14 Contactors open LED READY LEDs Active Interface Module 3 X400 X401 X402 3 3 DRIVE-CLiQ socket X500 Connection for Braking Module DCPA DCNA DCP DCN ~ = -F10 1 2 3 4 -F11 Connection between Active Interface Module and Active Line Module pre-assembled at the factory IPD Card -F24 Auxiliary power supply: P24L P24L M M Fan -X100 1 2 3 4 5 6 -X42 1 2 3 4 380 - 480 V 1 ph AC or 500 - 690 V 1 ph AC 230 V AC 24 V DC G_D213_EN_00060c Connection example of an Active Line Module (frame size FI/FX and GI/GX) Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/31 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Active Line Modules Block diagram Cabinet Module Cabinet Module DC busbar X500 3 230 V AC M L1 L2 L3 4 Fan 2 Precharging contactor 1 contactor DRIVE-CLiQ socket 2 Connection for Braking Module DCPA DCNA -X2 ≈ U1 -X1 V1 W1 PE -X9 L1 L2 U2 V2 W2 PE Line Connection Module (Option L42) DCP DCN ~ = -F10 -F11 -F20 -F21 Connection between Active Interface Module and Active Line Module pre-assembled at the factory 1 2 3 4 5 6 P24L P24L M M internal Fan1) IPD Card -F24 Auxiliary power supply: -X42 1 2 3 4 Fan -X100 1 2 3 4 READY DC LINK Internal POWER OK power supply -X9 P24 V 1 = M 2 = 3 Activation of 4 bypass contactor 5 Activation of 6 precharging -F101 -F102 +Temp -Temp EP +24 V EP M1 DRIVE-CLiQ socket 1 -X41 4 3 2 1 Voltage Sensing Module VSM10 DRIVE-CLiQ socket 0 Active Line Module LEDs Cabinet Module -X609 PE 1 P24 4 2 P24 3 M 4 M L 5 6 N7 8 9 1 10 11 2 12 13 14 Contactors open T1 T2 T3 -X1 L1 L2 L3 PE LED READY DRIVE-CLiQ socket Active Interface Module 3 X400 X401 X402 3 380 - 480 V 1 ph AC or 500 - 690 V 1 ph AC 230 V AC 24 V DC G_D213_EN_00061c 1) The Connection example of an Active Line Module (frame size HI/HX and JI/JX) 3/32 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 number of fans depends on the frame size. SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Active Line Modules Technical data Line Voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC Active Line Module 6SL37307TE32-1AU3 6SL37307TE32-6AU3 6SL37307TE33-8AU3 6SL37307TE35-0AU3 Rated power • For I N DC (60 Hz, 460 V) • For I N DC (50 Hz, 400 V) • For IH DC (60 Hz, 460 V) • For IH DC (50 Hz, 400 V) DC bus current • Rated current I N DC • Base load current I H DC 1) • Maximum current I max DC kW kW kW kW 150 132 132 115 180 160 160 145 270 235 235 210 350 300 300 270 A A A 235 209 352 291 259 436 425 378 637 549 489 823 Input current • Rated current INE • Maximum current I max E A A 210 315 260 390 380 570 490 735 A 1.27 0.6 0.63 1.27 0.6 1.13 1.52 1.2 1.8 1.52 1.2 1.8 4,200 41,600 5,200 41,600 7,800 76,800 9,600 76,800 kW cfm [m3/s] 4.4 [4.3] 1,380 [0.65] 5.1 [4.9] 1,380 [0.65] 7.2 [6.9] 2,760 [1.3] 9.0 [8.7] 2,760 [1.3] dB(A) 73 [71] 73 [71] 74 [72] 74 [72] ft [m] ft [m] 8,860 [2,700] 13,300 [4,050] IP20 8,860 [2,700] 13,300 [4,050] IP20 8,860 [2,700] 13,300 [4,050] IP20 8,860 [2,700] 13,300 [4,050] IP20 inch [mm] inch [mm] inch [mm] lb [kg] 31.5 [800] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 840 [380] FX + FI 31.5 [800] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 840 [380] FX + FI 31.5 [800] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,170 [530] GX + GI 31.5 [800] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,170 [530] GX + GI Current demand • 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 230V AC auxiliary power supply • 460 (400) V AC 2) DC bus capacitance • Basic Line Module • Drive line-up, max. Power loss, max.3) • At 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V] Cooling air requirement Sound pressure level L pA4) at 60 [50] Hz Output cable length, max.5) • Shielded • Unshielded Enclosure (base design) Enclosure dimensions • Width • Height 6) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size (ALM + AIM) A F F 1) The base load current I H DC is the basis for a duty cycle of duration 300 s with an overload of 150% x I H DC for 60 s, or I max DC for 5 s. 2)The current demand for the 460 (400) V AC auxiliary power supply is drawn from the line input voltage. 3)The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. 4)Total sound pressure level of Active Interface Module and Active Line Module combined. 5)Sum of lengths of all motor cables and DC bus. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request.. 6)The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 3 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/33 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Active Line Modules Technical data Active Line Module Line Voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC 6SL37307TE36-1AU3 6SL37307TE38-4AU3 For parallel connection, mounted to the left of the Line Connection Module 3 6SL37307TE41-0AU3 6SL37307TE41-4AU3 6SL37307TE41-0CU3 6SL37307TE41-4CU3 Rated power • For I N DC (60 Hz, 460 V) • For I N DC (50 Hz, 400 V) • For IH DC (60 Hz, 460 V) • For IH DC (50 Hz, 400 V) DC bus current • Rated current I N DC • Base load current I H DC 1) • Maximum current I max DC kW kW kW kW 450 380 380 335 560 500 500 465 710 630 630 545 1,000 900 900 780 A A A 678 603 1,017 940 837 1,410 1,103 982 1,654 1,574 1,404 2,361 Input current • Rated current INE • Maximum current I max E A A 605 907 840 1,260 985 1,477 1,405 2,107 A 1.57 4.6 3.6 1.57 4.6 3.6 1.67 4.9 5.4 1,67 4.9 5.4 12,600 134,400 16,800 134,400 18,900 230,400 28,800 230,400 kW cfm [m3/s] 12.1 [11.7] 3,350 [1.58] 14.3 [13.8] 3,350 [1.58] 18.3 [17.6] 4,000 [1.88] 22.7 [21.8] 4,000 [1.88] dB(A) 79 [77] 79 [77] 80 [78] 80 [78] ft [m] ft [m] 12,800 [3,900] 19,200 [5,850] IP20 12,800 [3,900] 19,200 [5,850] IP20 12,800 [3,900] 19,200 [5,850] IP20 12,800 [3,900] 19,200 [5,850] IP20 inch [mm] inch [mm] inch [mm] lb [kg] 39.4 [1,000] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 2,050 [930] HX + HI 39.4 [1,000] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 2,050 [930] HX + HI 55.1 [1,400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 3,000 [1,360] JX + JI 55.1 [1,400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 3,000 [1,360] JX + JI Current demand • 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 230V AC auxiliary power supply • 460 (400) V AC 2) DC bus capacitance • Basic Line Module • Drive line-up, max. Power loss, max.3) • At 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V] Cooling air requirement Sound pressure level L pA4) at 60 [50] Hz Output cable length, max.5) • Shielded • Unshielded Enclosure (base design) Enclosure dimensions • Width • Height 6) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size (ALM + AIM) A F F 1)The base load current I H DC is the basis for a duty cycle of duration 300 s with an overload of 150% x I H DC for 60 s, or I max DC for 5 s. 2)The current demand for the 460 (400) V AC auxiliary power supply is drawn from the line input voltage. 3)The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. 4)Total sound pressure level of Active Interface Module and Active Line Module combined. 5)Sum of lengths of all motor cables and DC bus. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request.. 6)The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA (IP54) enclosure. 3/34 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 12 ventilated SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Active Line Modules Technical data Line Voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC Note: UL Listing is valid only for <600 V Active Line Module 6SL37307TG35-8AU3 For parallel connection, mounted to the left of the Line Connection Module Rated power kW • For I N DC (60 Hz, 575 V) • For I N DC (50 Hz, 690 V) kW 6SL37307TG37-4AU3 6SL37307TG41-0AU3 6SL37307TG41-3AU3 6SL37307TG37-4CU3 6SL37307TG41-0CU3 6SL37307TG41-3CU3 450 560 630 800 900 1,100 1,200 1,400 450 550 560 705 800 980 1,000 1,215 3 • For I H DC (60 Hz, 575 V) • For I H DC (50 Hz, 690 V) DC bus current • Rated current I N DC kW kW A 644 823 1,148 1,422 • Base load current I H DC 1) • Maximum current I max DC A A 573 966 732 1,234 1,022 1,722 1,266 2,133 Input current • Rated current I NE • Maximum current I max E A A 575 862 735 1,102 1,025 1,537 1,270 1,905 A 1.57 4.6 2.6 [2.1] 1.67 4.9 3.8 [3.1] 1.87 4.9 3.8 [3.1] 1.87 4.9 3.8 [3.1] 7,400 59,200 11,100 153,600 14,400 153,600 19,200 153,600 18.6 [19.2] 4,000 [1,88] 22.1 [22.8] 4,000 [1.88] 24.9 [26.1] 4,000 [1.88] Current demand • 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 230V AC auxiliary power supply • 575 (690) V AC 2) DC bus capacitance • Basic Line Module • Drive line-up, max. Power loss, max.3) • At 60 Hz 575V [50 Hz 690V] Cooling air requirement Sound pressure level L pA 4) (1M) at 60 [50] Hz Output cable length, max.5) • Shielded • Unshielded Enclosure (base design) Enclosure dimensions • Width • Height 6) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size A F F kW 13.0 [13.6] cfm [m3/s] 3,350 [1.58] dB(A) 79 [77] 79 [77] 79 [77] 79 [77] ft [m] ft [m] 7,400 [2,250] 11,100 [3,375] IP20 7,400 [2,250] 11,100 [3,375] IP20 7,400 [2,250] 11,100 [3,375] IP20 7,400 [2,250] 11,100 [3,375] IP20 inch [mm] inch [mm] inch [mm] lb [kg] 39.4 [1,000] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 2,050 [930] HX + HI 55.1 [1,400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 3,000 [1,360] JX + JI 55.1 [1,400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 3,000 [1,360] JX + JI 55.1 [1,400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 3,000 [1,360] JX + JI 1) The base load current I H DC is the basis for a duty cycle of duration 300 s with an overload of 150% x I H DC for 60 s, or I max DC for 5 s. 2)The current demand for the 575 (690) V AC auxiliary power supply is drawn from the line input voltage. 3)The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. 4)Total sound pressure level of Active Interface Module and Active Line Module combined. 5)Sum of lengths of all motor cables and DC bus. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request.. 6)The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/35 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Active Line Modules Options The table below lists the available options for Active Line Modules (refer to Description of the Options for details). 3 Available Options CBC10 Communication Board (CANbus) CBE20 Communication Board (Ethernet) Monitoring of precharge function AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel installed in the cabinet door CU320-2 DP Control Unit (PROFIBUS DP) Performance expansion for CU320-2 CU320-2 PN Control Unit (PROFINET) Enclosure space heater 25/125 kW braking unit (for frame size FX) for line voltages of 380 ... 480 V and 660 ... 690 V 50/250 kW braking unit (for frame size GX/HX/JX) for line voltages of 380 ... 480 V and 660 ... 690 V 25/125 kW braking unit (for frame size FX) for line voltages of 500 ... 600 V 50/250 kW braking unit (for frame size GX/HX/JX) for line voltages of 500 ... 600 V Base (plinth) 100mm Base (plinth) 200mm (cable marshalling space) Enclosure NEMA 1 (IP21) Enclosure NEMA 1 filtered (IP23) [includes M60] Side panel (right) Side panel (left) Enclosure IP43 [includes M60] Enclosure NEMA 12 (ventilated) (IP54) [includes M60] Solid cabinet door (no ventilation openings, air inlet through floor) Additional touch protection [included in M23, M43 & M54] DC busbar system (Id = 1,170 A, 1x 60 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 1,500 A, 1x 80 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 1,840 A, 1x 100 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 2,150 A, 2x 60 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 2,730 A, 2x 80 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 3,320 A, 2x 100 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 3,720 A, 3x 80 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 4,480 A, 3x 100 x 10 mm) Lifting beam/eye bolts UL listing per UL508A [requires M23, M43 or M54] cUL listing per UL508A for Canada [requires M23, M43 or M54, plus T58] 1) Only in combination with options K90 or K95. 3/36 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 Option code G20 1) G33 1) G56 K08 1) K90 K94 1) K95 L55 L61 L62 L64 L65 M06 M07 M21 M23 M26 M27 M43 M54 M59 M60 M80 M81 M82 M83 M84 M85 M86 M87 M90 U90 U91 Available Options Special enclosure paint color [specify color] Assembly into transport sections [specify sections] 1-line label for customer text, 40 x 80 mm [specify text] 2-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text] 4-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text] Customer drawings in dxf format Advance copy of customer documentation (pdf) Documentation English/French Nameplate English/French Visual Inspection by customer Witnessed or observed function test without motor Witnessed or observed test incl. high-voltage and insulation test Customer specific test (on request) Option code Y09 Y11 Y31 Y32 Y33 D02 D14 D58 T58 F03 F71 F77 F97 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Active Line Modules Options Option combination matrix for Active Line Modules The following tables provide an overview of possible and impermissible combinations of standard options. Please refer to the descriptions of options for more information. Custom configurations may be possible to provide combinations not available as standard – please contact the factory. Combination is possible – Combination is not possible 3 Electrical Options G20 G20 G33 G33 K08 K90 K94 K95 K61 L62 L64 L65 – – – – – – – K08 K90 – K94 K95 – L61 L62 – L64 – – L65 – – – M59 M60 M90 Mechanical Options M06 M07 M07 M21 M23 M43 M54 Y11 U90 U91 – – – – – M06 – – M21 – – – – – – – M23 – M43 – – M54 – – – – – – M59 M60 – – M90 – Y11 U90 – – U91 – – – – Siemens D21.7 – 2013 3/37 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Active Line Modules Options DC busbar system Options Within a line-up, all DC bus needs to be of the same width (60, 80 or 100 mm). DC bus current ratings may vary within a line-up by using either a single busbar, or two or three busbars in parallel per pole. The following table indicates which busbar options for the various cabinet modules may be combined within a line-up. Combination is possible – Combination is not possible 3 M80 M81 M82 – – M80 M81 – M82 – – – – M83 M84 – M85 – M86 – M87 – M83 – – – Y31 Y31 Y32 Y33 – – Y32 – Y33 – – 3/38 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – M87 – – – – – Label Options M86 – – – – M85 – – – – M84 – – SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules 5 Motor Modules & Braking Modules 4 4/3 Overview of Motor Modules Motor Modules Chassis format Motor Modules Booksize format Control of Motor Modules Dynamic braking 4/4 Motor Modules Chassis format Overview Design Selection and ordering data Block diagram Technical data Options 4/19 Motor Modules Booksize format Overview Design Selection and ordering data Block diagram Technical data Options 4/28 Braking Modules Braking Modules – Chassis mounted Motor Modules Chassis format configured as braking units Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Overview of motor modules Motor Modules are the link between the 3-phase AC motors and the common DC bus. They are IGBT based pulse width modulated (PWM) inverters that convert DC to variable voltage, variable frequency 3-phase AC to operate motors at variable speed. Motor Modules are inherently capable of four quadrant (4Q) operation, meaning that they can operate the motor in forward and reverse directions of operation, both when motoring (supplying power from the DC bus to the motor) or regenerating (taking power from the motor and feeding it to the DC bus). Motor Modules are available in two designs: 4 • Chassis format: Chassis format Motor Modules cover the power range from 125 to 900 kW (150 to 1,150 HP) at 380 – 480 V, and 70 to 1,000 kW (100 to 1,250 HP) at 500 – 600 V. The power rating can be increased up to almost 4,000 kW (5,000 HP) by connecting up to four motor modules in parallel. Each chassis format Motor Module is mounted in its own cabinet. • Booksize format: At the low end of the power range from 4.8 kW to 82 kW (5 to 100 HP) at 380 V to 480 V only, Motor Modules are available as Booksize Cabinet Kits that are installed in Booksize Base Cabinets. Each Booksize Base Cabinet can contain multiple Booksize Cabinet Kits. Motor Module cabinets may include optional power components (such as output reactors or filters) and control components (such as control units and/or encoder interface modules) as detailed in the respective sections. Alternatively, control components may be installed remotely and connected to the Motor Module by DRIVE-CLiQ cables. For example, control units, I/O modules and encoder interface modules may be mounted in a central control cabinet that does not contain any power circuits, or alternatively encoder interface and temperature sensor modules may be mounted near the motor, as appropriate. Each motor module may have a dedicated control unit, or alternatively a Line Module and multiple Motor Modules may be controlled by a single control unit – the quantity of power modules controlled by a control unit depends on the type of control (vector or servo) and the required performance. There are various possibilities to achieve dynamic braking: • Braking Modules mounted in chassis: Braking Modules with continuous/peak braking powers of 25/125 kW (frame size FX) or 50/250 kW (frame size GX, HX, JX) can be mounted inside each chassis power block. Chassis with multiple power blocks can have a braking module mounted in each power block (2 for frame size HX, 3 for frame size JX). These braking modules are offered with matching braking resistors (each braking module requires its own resistor). • Motor Modules configured as Braking Modules: All chassis format Motor Modules can be configured as braking modules, where a 3-phase resistor (or 3 resistors in wye connection) is connected to the output instead of a motor. Depending on the choice of motor module, continuous/peak braking powers in the range of approx. 100/150 kW to 1,500/2,200 kW can be obtained. SINAMICS S120 drive firmware includes the functionality to operate a motor module as a braking module as standard. Central Braking Modules as offered in the IEC product spectrum of SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules are not included in this North American catalog since they are not UL listed. However, for line-ups that do not require UL listing they are available as another alternative to achieve high braking powers with a fast response time. Common DC Bus Booksize Base Cabinet Motor Module Motor Module Line Connection Module AC to motor 4/2 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 Line Module AC line supply Booksize Cabinet Kit Booksize Cabinet Kit AC to motor Booksize Cabinet Kit AC to motor Motor Module Motor Module AC to motor Motor Module used as Braking Module External Braking Resistor SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Overview Design Motor Modules in the chassis format contain the following components: •Nickel plated DC bus, including DC connections to the Motor Module •Nickel plated bus stabs for connecting motor cables for Motor Modules frame sizes FX and GX; for Motor Modules frame sizes HX and JX, the connection is made directly on the unit •Cable support bar for the electric power cables •DRIVE-CLiQ interface (3 DRIVE-CLiQ sockets), without Control Unit •Customer terminal interface -X55 •Auxiliary power supply system (6-pole) for the auxiliary power supplies, including cable connections for looping through to the next Cabinet Module •Ground (PE) busbar (60 × 10 mm), including jumper for looping through to the next Cabinet Module •EMC-compliant design by additional shielding measures and appropriate routing of wiring. Each Motor Module chassis format is mounted in its own cabinet. Motor Modules are available for the following voltages and currents. Line voltage Rated power 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC 125 … 900 kW [150 … 1,150 HP] 500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. 70 (75) … 1,000 (1,200) kW [75 … 1,250 HP @ 575V] Up to four identical Motor Modules may be connected in parallel to increase the available shaft power up to approx. 4,750 HP (3,800 kW) at 575 V. Motor Modules connected in parallel are controlled by a single common control unit. Due to the possibility of unequal current sharing the rated current of the Motor Modules must be derated by 5%. Unless each Motor Module is connected to a single motor winding, some impedance must be provided on the output either by using motor reactors, or by running separate cables of a minimum length from each Motor Module. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 4/3 4 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Chassis Format Selection and ordering data 4 Rated power Rated power at 460 (400) V at 460 V kW HP Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC) 125 (110) 150 160 (132) 200 200 (160) 250 300 250 (200) 300 (250) 400 500 355 (315) 450 (400) 600 500 (450) 700 650 (560) 800 800 (710) 1,000 1,150 900 (800) Rated power Rated power at 575 (690) at 575 V kW HP Line voltage 500 … 690 V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 675 … 900 V DC) 75 60 (75) 75 (90) 100 90( 110) 125 110 (132) 150 132 (160) 150 160 (200) 200 200 (250) 250 250 (315) 300 300 (400) 400 350 (450 450 450 (560) 600 560 (710) 700 630 (800) 800 750 (900) 900 800 (1,000) 1,000 1,000 (1,200) 1,250 Rated output current IN A kA Motor Module chassis format Order No. 210 260 310 380 490 605 745 840 985 1,260 1,405 65 65 65 65 65 65 84 84 84 100 100 6SL3720-1TE32-1AU3 6SL3720-1TE32-6AU3 6SL3720-1TE33-1AU3 6SL3720-1TE33-8AU3 6SL3720-1TE35-0AU3 6SL3720-1TE36-1AU3 6SL3720-1TE37-5AU3 6SL3720-1TE38-4AU3 6SL3720-1TE41-0AU3 6SL3720-1TE41-2AU3 6SL3720-1TE41-4AU3 Rated output current IN A SCCR 1) kA Motor Module chassis format Order No. 85 100 120 150 175 216 260 330 410 465 575 735 810 910 1,025 1,270 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 84 84 84 100 100 100 6SL3720-1TG28-5AU3 6SL3720-1TG31-0AU3 6SL3720-1TG31-2AU3 6SL3720-1TG31-5AU3 6SL3720-1TG31-8AU3 6SL3720-1TG32-2AU3 6SL3720-1TG32-6AU3 6SL3720-1TG33-3AU3 6SL3720-1TG34-1AU3 6SL3720-1TG34-7AU3 6SL3720-1TG35-8AU3 6SL3720-1TG37-4AU3 6SL3720-1TG38-1AU3 6SL3720-1TG38-8AU3 6SL3720-1TG41-0AU3 6SL3720-1TG41-3AU3 SCCR 1) 1) Pending completion of the UL listing project of SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules, the SCCR of the line-up is limited by the SCCR of the smallest Motor Module it contains. 4/4 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Chassis Format Block diagram Motor Modules are controlled by the CU320-2 DP or CU320-2 PN Control Unit. By selecting option codes K90 or K95 the Control Unit is included in the motor module cabinet, complete with the DRIVE-CLiQ cable connecting it to the motor module. However, if the Control Unit is also used to control other motor modules, or if the Control Unit is to be mounted separately, the DRIVE-CLiQ cables are excluded and need to be added by others. For additional information, please refer to the section on Integration Engineering, page 5/8. Cabinet Module DC busbar DCP DCN DCPA DCNA = DCPS DCNS 4 = -X9 1 2 3 4 5 6 READY LEDs Customer terminal block -X55 DRIVE-CLiQ socket 2 Motor Module DRIVE-CLiQ socket 1 DRIVE-CLiQ socket 0 X400 X401 X402 DC LINK POWER OK P24 V -X2 M = Internal power supply ~ U2 V2 W2 M 3~ PE -F10 L1 L2 -F11 Fan -F20 2) 3) 380 - 480 V 1 ph AC or 500 - 690 V 1 ph AC +Temp -Temp EP +24 V EP M1 -X46 1 2 3 4 BR Output+ BR OutputFB Input+ FB Input- -X42 1 2 3 4 P24L P24L M M internal Fan1) M IPD Card -F24 Auxiliary power supply: -X100 1 2 3 4 5 6 -F21 -X41 4 3 2 1 G_D213_EN_00064c 230 V AC 24 V DC 1) The number and the terminals of the fans depend on the frame size. 2) Connection of temperature sensor for motors without DRIVE-CliQ interface. 3) Required for Safety Integrated. Connection example of a Motor Module Siemens D21.7 – 2013 4/5 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Chassis Format Technical data Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC Motor Module chassis format 6SL37206SL37206SL37201TE32-1AU3 1TE32-6AU3 1TE33-1AU3 6SL37201TE33-8AU3 6SL37206SL37201TE35-0AU3 1TE36-1AU3 kW [HP] kW kW [HP] kW 125 [150] 110 110 [125] 90 160 [200] 132 132 [150] 110 200 [250] 160 160 [200] 132 250 [300] 200 200 [250] 160 300 [400] 250 250 [350] 200 355 [500] 315 315 [400] 250 A A A A 210 260 310 380 490 605 205 250 302 370 477 590 178 233 277 340 438 460 307 375 453 555 715 885 A A 252 312 281 372 335 456 411 588 529 726 653 A A 245 221 304 362 444 573 707 273 326 400 515 636 A A 224 277 331 405 523 646 202 250 298 365 470 581 A A 0.8 0.63 4,200 0.8 1.13 5,200 0.9 1.8 6,300 0.9 1.8 7,800 0.9 1.0 1.8 3.6 9,600 12,600 kHz kHz 2 2 2 2 2 1.25 8 8 8 8 8 7.5 kW 1.94 [1.86] 2.6 [2.5] 3.1 [2.96] 3.8 [3.67] 4.5 [4.28] 6.3 [5.84] cfm [m3/s] 360 [0.17] 487 [0.23] 763 [0.36] 763 [0.36] 763 [0.36] 1,653 [0.78] dB(A) 67 69 69 69 69 72 Rated power • For I L (60 Hz, 460 V) 1) 2) • For I L (50 Hz, 400 V) 1) • For I H (60 Hz, 460 V) 1) 2) • For I H (50 Hz, 400 V) 1) Output current • Rated current I N • Base load current I L 3) 4 • Base load current I H 4) • Maximum current I max A DC bus current • Rated current I N DC if supplied by - Basic/Smart Line Module - Active Line Module • Rated current I L DC 3) if supplied by - Basic/Smart Line Module - Active Line Module • Rated current I H DC 4) if supplied by - Basic/Smart Line Module - Active Line Module Current demand • 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 460 (400) V AC DC bus capacitance F 227 Pulse frequency 5) • Rated • Maximum (with derating) Power loss, max. 6) • At 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V] Cooling air requirement Sound pressure level L pA (1m) at 60 [50] Hz power in kW is of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor with an FLA of IL or IH at the listed voltage and frequency. power in HP is based on NEC table 430-150. Note that HP ratings are provided as a guide only, for standard 2, 4 or 6 pole motors. Actual motor currents may be higher, especially for motors with 8 or more poles. 3) The base load current ILis the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 110 % for 60 s or 150 % for 10 s. 4) The base load current IH is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 150 % for 60 s or 160 % for 10 s. 5) Information regarding the correlation between the pulse frequency and max. output current/output frequency is provided in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. 6) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. 1) Rated 2) Rated 4/6 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Chassis Format Technical data Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC 6SL37201TE32-6AU3 6SL37201TE33-1AU3 6SL37201TE33-8AU3 6SL37206SL3720- 1TE35-0AU3 1TE36-1AU3 2x 350 MCM 2x 350 MCM 2x 500 MCM 2x 500 MCM 2x 500 MCM 4x 500 MCM 980 [300] 980 [300] 980 [300] 980 [300] 980 [300] 980 [300] 1,480 [450] 1,480 [450] 1,480 [450] 1,480 [450] 1,480 [450] 1,480 [450] IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 inch [mm] inch [mm] inch [mm] lb [kg] 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 320 [145] FX 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 320 [145] FX 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 631 [286] GX 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 631 [286] GX 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 631 [286] GX 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,080 [490] HX kA 65 65 65 65 65 65 Motor connection U2, V2, W2 • Conductor size, max. Output cable length, max. • Shielded Motor Module chassis format 6SL37201TE32-1AU3 7) • Unshielded Enclosure (base design) Enclosure dimensions, nominal • Width 8) • Height 9) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) per UL508A ft (m) ft (m) Sum of lengths of all motor cables. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. 8) Option L10 (dv/dt filter plus VPL) for frame sizes FX/GX/HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide. Option L08 (motor reactor) for frame sizes HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide. 9) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21)and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. 7) Siemens D21.7 – 2013 4/7 4 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Chassis Format Technical data Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC Motor Module chassis format 6SL37206SL37201TE37-5AU3 1TE38-4AU3 6SL37201TE41-0AU3 6SL37201TE41-2AU3 6SL37201TE41-4AU3 kW [HP] kW kW [HP] kW 450 [600] 400 355 [500] 315 500 [700] 450 450 [600] 400 630 [800] 560 500 [700] 450 800 [1,000] 710 630 [900] 560 900 [1,150] 800 800 [1,000] 710 A A A A 745 840 985 1,260 1,405 725 820 960 1,230 1,370 570 700 860 1,127 1,257 1,087 1,230 1,440 1,845 2,055 A A 894 1,008 907 1,182 1,064 1,512 1,361 1,686 1,517 A A 871 784 982 1,152 1,474 1,643 884 1,037 1,326 1,479 A A 795 897 1,051 1,345 1,500 716 807 946 1,211 1,350 A A 1.0 1.0 1.25 1.4 1.4 3.6 3.6 5.4 5.4 5.4 15,600 16,800 18,900 26,100 28,800 kHz kHz 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 kW 7.3 [6.68] Rated power • For I L (60 Hz, 460 V) 1) 2) • For I L (50 Hz, 400 V) 1) • For I H (60 Hz, 460 V) 1) 2) • For I H (50 Hz, 400 V) 1) Output current • Rated current I N A • Base load current I L 3) 4 • Base load current I H 4) • Maximum current I max A DC bus current • Rated current I N DC if supplied by - Basic/Smart Line Module - Active Line Module • Rated current I L DC 3) if supplied by - Basic/Smart Line Module - Active Line Module • Rated current I H DC 4) if supplied by - Basic/Smart Line Module - Active Line Module Current demand • 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 460 (400) V AC DC bus capacitance F 805 Pulse frequency 5) • Rated • Maximum (with derating) Power loss, max. 6) • At 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V] Cooling air requirement Sound pressure level L pA (1m) at 60 [50] Hz 7.8 [7.15] 10.2 [9.5] 12.0 [11.1] 13.0 [12.0] cfm [m3/s] 1,653 [0.78] 1,653 [0.78] 2,331 [1.1] 2,331 [1.1] 2,331 [1.1] dB(A) 72 72 72 72 72 power in kW is of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor with an FLA of I L or I H at the listed voltage and frequency. power in HP is based on NEC table 430-150. Note that HP ratings are provided as a guide only, for standard 2, 4 or 6 pole motors. Actual motor currents may be higher, especially for motors with 8 or more poles. 3) The base load current I L is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 110 % for 60 s or 150 % for 10 s. 4) The base load current I H is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 150 % for 60 s or 160 % for 10 s. 5) Information regarding the correlation between the pulse frequency and max. output current/output frequency is provided in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. 6) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. 1) Rated 2) Rated 4/8 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Chassis Format Technical data Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC Motor Module chassis format 6SL37206SL37201TE37-5AU3 1TE38-4AU3 6SL37201TE41-0AU3 6SL37201TE41-2AU3 6SL37201TE41-4AU3 4x 500 MCM 4x 500 MCM 6x 500 MCM 6x 500 MCM 6x 500 MCM 980 [300] 980 [300] 980 [300] 980 [300] 980 [300] 1,480 [450] 1,480 [450] 1,480 [450] 1,480 [450] 1,480 [450] IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 inch [mm] inch [mm] inch [mm] lb [kg] 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,080 [490] HX 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,080 [490] HX 31.5 [800] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,543 [700] JX 31.5 [800] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,543 [700] JX 31.5 [800] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,543 [700] JX kA 84 84 84 100 100 Motor connection U2, V2, W2 • Conductor size, max. Output cable length, max. 7) • Shielded • Unshielded ft (m) ft (m) Enclosure (base design) Enclosure dimensions, nominal • Width 8) • Height 9) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) per UL508A 4 Sum of lengths of all motor cables. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. 8) Option L10 (dv/dt filter plus VPL) for frame sizes FX/GX/HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide. Option L08 (motor reactor) for frame sizes HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide. 9) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. 7) Siemens D21.7 – 2013 4/9 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Chassis Format Technical data Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 675 … 900 (1,035) V DC) Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V Motor Module chassis format 6SL37201TG28-5AU3 6SL37201TG31-0AU3 6SL37201TG31-2AU3 6SL37201TG31-5AU3 6SL37201TG31-8AU3 6SL37201TG32-2AU3 kW [HP] kW kW [HP] kW 55 [75] 75 45 [60] 55 75 [100] 90 55 [75] 75 90 [125] 110 75 [100] 90 110 [150] 132 90 [125] 110 132 [150] 160 110 [150] 132 160 [200] 200 132 [200] 160 A A A A 85 100 120 150 175 215 80 95 115 142 170 208 76 89 107 134 157 192 120 142 172 213 255 312 A A 102 120 108 144 130 180 162 210 189 258 232 A A 99 89 117 140 175 204 251 105 126 157 184 226 A A 90 106 128 160 186 229 81 96 115 144 168 206 A A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.4 0.4 1.0 1,200 1,200 0.4 2,800 1.0 F 0.4 1,600 2,800 2,800 kHz kHz 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 kW 1.1 [1.17] 1.3 [1.43] 1.77 [1.89] 1.62 [1.8] 2.5 [2.67] 2.91 [3.09] cfm [m3/s] 360 [0.17] 360 [0.17] 360 [0.17] 360 [0.17] 763 [0.36] 763 [0.36] dB(A) 67 67 67 67 69 69 Rated power • For I L (60 Hz, 575 V) 1) 2) • For I L (50 Hz, 690 V) 1) • For I H (60 Hz, 575 V) 1) 2) • For I H (50 Hz, 690 V) 1) Output current • Rated current I N A • Base load current I L 3) 4 • Base load current I H 4) • Maximum current I max A DC bus current • Rated current I N DC if supplied by - Basic/Smart Line Module - Active Line Module • Rated current I L DC 3) if supplied by - Basic/Smart Line Module - Active Line Module • Rated current I H DC 4) if supplied by - Basic/Smart Line Module - Active Line Module Current demand • 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 575 (690) V AC DC bus capacitance 92 Pulse frequency 5) • Rated • Maximum (with derating) Power loss, max. 6) • At 60 Hz 475V [50 Hz 690V] Cooling air requirement Sound pressure level L pA (1m) at 60 [50] Hz power in kW is of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor with an FLA of I L or I H at the listed voltage and frequency. power in HP is based on NEC table 430-150. Note that HP ratings are provided as a guide only, for standard 2, 4 or 6 pole motors. Actual motor currents may be higher, especially for motors with 8 or more poles. 3) The base load current I L is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 110 % for 60 s or 150 % for 10 s. 4) The base load current I H is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 150 % for 60 s or 160 % for 10 s. 5) Information regarding the correlation between the pulse frequency and max. output current/output frequency is provided in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. 6) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. 1) Rated 2) Rated 4/10 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Chassis Format Technical data Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 675 … 900 (1,035) V DC) Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V Motor Module chassis format 6SL37201TG28-5AU3 6SL3720-1 6SL3720- 6SL3720- 6SL3720- 6SL3720TG31-0AU3 1TG31-2AU3 1TG31-5AU3 1TG31-8AU3 1TG32-2AU3 2x 350 MCM 2x 350 MCM 980 [300] 980 [300] 980 [300] 980 [300] 980 [300] 980 [300] 1,480 [450] 1,480 [450] 1,480 [450] 1,480 [450] 1,480 [450] 1,480 [450] IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 320 [145] FX 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 320 [145] FX 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 320 [145] FX 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 320 [145] FX 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 631 [286] GX 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 631 [286] 65 65 65 65 65 65 Motor connection U2, V2, W2 • Conductor size, max. 2x 350 MCM 2x 350 MCM 2x 500 MCM 2x 500 MCM Output cable length, max. 7) • Shielded • Unshielded ft (m) ft (m) Enclosure (base design) Enclosure dimensions, nominal • Width 8) • Height 9) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) per UL508A inch [mm] inch [mm] inch [mm] lb [kg] kA GX Sum of lengths of all motor cables. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. 8) Option L10 (dv/dt filter plus VPL) for frame sizes FX/GX/HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide. Option L08 (motor reactor) for frame sizes HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide. 9) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. 7) Siemens D21.7 – 2013 4/11 4 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Chassis Format Technology Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 675 … 900 (1,035) V DC) Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V Motor Module chassis format 6SL3720- 6SL37201TG32-6AU3 1TG33-3AU3 6SL37201TG34-1AU3 6SL37201TG34-7AU3 6SL37201TG35-8AU3 kW [HP] kW kW [HP] kW 200 [250] 250 160 [250] 200 250 [300] 315 200 [300] 250 300 [400] 400 250 [350] 315 400 [450] 450 315 [450] 400 450 [600] 560 400 [500] 450 A A A A 260 330 410 465 575 250 320 400 452 560 233 280 367 416 514 375 480 600 678 840 A A 312 396 356 492 443 558 502 690 621 A A 304 273 386 479 544 672 347 431 489 605 A A 277 352 437 496 614 250 316 394 446 552 0.9 1.0 3900 0.9 1.0 4200 1.0 2.1 7400 1.0 2.1 7400 2.1 kHz kHz 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 kW Rated power • For I L (60 Hz, 575 V) 1) 2) • For I L (50 Hz, 690 V) 1) • For I H (60 Hz, 575 V) 1) 2) • For I H (50 Hz, 690 V) 1) Output current • Rated current I N A • Base load current I L 3) 4 • Base load current I H 4) • Maximum current I max A DC bus current • Rated current I N DC if supplied by - Basic/Smart Line Module - Active Line Module • Rated current I L DC 3) if supplied by - Basic/Smart Line Module - Active Line Module • Rated current I H DC 4) if supplied by - Basic/Smart Line Module - Active Line Module Current demand • 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 575 (690) V AC DC bus capacitance A A F 281 1.0 7400 Pulse frequency 5) • Rated • Maximum (with derating) Power loss, max. 6) • At 60 Hz 475V [50 Hz 690V] Cooling air requirement Sound pressure level L pA (1m) at 60 [50] Hz 3.38 [3.62] 3.98 [4.34] 5.71 [6.13] 6.32 [6.8] 9.7 [10.3] cfm [m3/s] 763 [0.36] 763 [0.36] 1,653 [0.78] 1,653 [0.78] 1,653 [0.78] dB(A) 69 72 72 72 69 power in kW is of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor with an FLA of I L or I H at the listed voltage and frequency. power in HP is based on NEC table 430-150. Note that HP ratings are provided as a guide only, for standard 2, 4 or 6 pole motors. Actual motor currents may be higher, especially for motors with 8 or more poles. 3) The base load current I L is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 110 % for 60 s or 150 % for 10 s. 4) The base load current I H is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 150 % for 60 s or 160 % for 10 s. 5) Information regarding the correlation between the pulse frequency and max. output current/output frequency is provided in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. 6) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. 1) Rated 2) Rated 4/12 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Chassis Format Technology Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 675 … 900 (1,035) V DC) Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V Motor Module chassis format 6SL3720- 6SL37201TG32-6AU3 1TG33-3AU3 6SL3720- 1TG34-6AU3 6SL37201TG34-7AU3 6SL37201TG35-8AU3 2x 500 MCM 2x 500 MCM 4x 500 MCM 4x 500 MCM 4x 500 MCM 980 [300] 1,480 [450] 980 [300] 1,480 [450] 980 [300] 1,480 [450] 980 [300] 1,480 [450] 980 [300] 1,480 [450] IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 inch [mm] inch [mm] inch [mm] lb [kg] 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 631 [286] GX 16 [400] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 631 [286] GX 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,080 [490] HX 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,080 [490] HX 24 [600] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,080 [490] HX kA 65 65 65 65 84 Motor connection U2, V2, W2 • Conductor size, max. Output cable length, max. 7) • Shielded • Unshielded Enclosure (base design) Enclosure dimensions, nominal • Width 8) • Height 9) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) per UL508A ft (mm) ft (mm) Sum of lengths of all motor cables. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. 8) Option L10 (dv/dt filter plus VPL) for frame sizes FX/GX/HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide. Option L08 (motor reactor) for frame sizes HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide. 9) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. 7) Siemens D21.7 – 2013 4/13 4 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Chassis Format Technology Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 675 … 900 (1,035) V DC) Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V Motor Module chassis format 6SL37206SL37201TG37-4AU3 1TG38-1AU3 6SL37201TG38-8AU3 6SL37201TG41-0AU3 6SL37201TG41-3AU3 kW [HP] kW kW [HP] kW 560 [700] 710 500 [600] 630 630 [800] 800 560 [700] 710 710 [900] 900 630 [800] 800 800 [1,000] 1,000 710 [900] 900 1,000 [1,250] 1,200 800 [1,000] 1,000 A A A A 735 810 910 1,025 1,270 710 790 880 1,000 1,230 657 724 814 917 1,136 1,065 1,185 1,320 1,500 1,845 A A 882 972 875 1,092 983 1,230 1,107 1,524 1,372 A A 859 774 947 1,064 1,199 1,485 853 958 1,079 1,337 A A 784 865 971 1,094 1,356 706 778 874 985 1,221 1.25 1.25 3.1 3.1 11,100 1.4 3.1 14,400 3.1 11,100 1.4 3.1 14,400 kHz kHz 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 kW 10 [10.9] Rated power • For I L (60 Hz, 575 V) 1) 2) • For I L (50 Hz, 690 V) 1) • For I H (60 Hz, 575 V) 1) 2) • For I H (50 Hz, 690 V) 1) Output current • Rated current I N A • Base load current I L 3) 4 • Base load current I H 4) • Maximum current I max A DC bus current • Rated current I N DC if supplied by - Basic/Smart Line Module - Active Line Module • Rated current I L DC 3) if supplied by - Basic/Smart Line Module - Active Line Module • Rated current I H DC 4) if supplied by - Basic/Smart Line Module - Active Line Module Current demand • 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 575 (690) V AC DC bus capacitance A A F 794 1.4 19,200 Pulse frequency 5) • Rated • Maximum (with derating) Power loss, max. 6) • At 60 Hz 475V [50 Hz 690V] Cooling air requirement Sound pressure level L pA (1m) at 60 [50] Hz 10.5 [11.5] 10.6 [11.7] 12 [13.2] 14.2 [16] cfm [m3/s] 3,123 [1.474] 3,123 [1.474] 3,123 [1.474] 3,123 [1.474] 3,123 [1.474] dB(A) 72 72 72 72 72 power in kW is of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor with an FLA of I L or I H at the listed voltage and frequency. power in HP is based on NEC table 430-150. Note that HP ratings are provided as a guide only, for standard 2, 4 or 6 pole motors. Actual motor currents may be higher, especially for motors with 8 or more poles. 3) The base load current I L is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 110 % for 60 s or 150 % for 10 s. 4) The base load current I H is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 150 % for 60 s or 160 % for 10 s. 5) Information regarding the correlation between the pulse frequency and max. output current/output frequency is provided in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. 6) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. 1) Rated 2) Rated 4/14 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Chassis Format Technology Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 675 … 900 (1,035) V DC) Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V Motor Module chassis format 6SL3720-1 6SL3720TG37-4AU3 1TG38-1AU3 6SL37201TG38-8AU3 6SL37201TG41-0AU3 6SL37201TG41-3AU3 6x 500 MCM 6x 500 MCM 6x 500 MCM 6x 500 MCM 6x 500 MCM 980 [300] 1,480 [450] 980 [300] 1,480 [450] 980 [300] 1,480 [450] 980 [300] 1,480 [450] 980 [300] 1,480 [450] IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 inch [mm] inch [mm] inch [mm] lb [kg] 31.5 [800] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,543 [700] JX 31.5 [800] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,543 [700] JX 31.5 [800] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,543 [700] JX 31.5 [800] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,543 [700] JX 31.5 [800] 87 [2,200] 24 [600] 1,543 [700] JX kA 84 84 100 100 100 Motor connection U2, V2, W2 • Conductor size, max. Output cable length, max. 7) • Shielded • Unshielded Enclosure (base design) Enclosure dimensions, nominal • Width 8) • Height 9) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) per UL508A ft (m) ft (m) Sum of lengths of all motor cables. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. 8) Option L10 (dv/dt filter plus VPL) for frame sizes FX/GX/HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide. Option L08 (motor reactor) for frame sizes HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide. 9) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. 7) Siemens D21.7 – 2013 4/15 4 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Chassis Format Options The table below lists the available options for Motor Modules chassis format (refer to Description of the Options for details). Available Options CBC10 Communication Board (CANbus) G20 1) Base (plinth) 100mm M06 CBE20 Communication Board (Ethernet) G33 1) Base (plinth) 200mm (cable marshalling space) M07 Monitoring of precharge function G56 3) M21 Safety license for 1 to 5 axes K01 to K05 Enclosure NEMA 1 (IP21) AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel installed in the cabinet door 4 Option code Option code Available Options K08 1) SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted K46 SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted K48 SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module Additional SMC30 Sensor Module Enclosure NEMA 1 filtered (IP23) [includes M60] M23 M26 Side panel (right) M27 Side panel (left) Enclosure IP43 [includes M60] M43 K50 Enclosure NEMA 12 (ventilated) (IP54) [includes M60] M54 K51 K52 Solid cabinet door (no ventilation openings, air inlet through floor) Terminal interface for the Safe Torque Off and Safe Stop 1 safety functions K82 Additional touch protection TM54F Terminal Module K87 DC busbar system (Id = 1,170 A, 1x 60 x 10 mm) M80 K88 2) DC busbar system (Id = 1,500 A, 1x 80 x 10 mm) M81 Safe Brake Adapter SBA, 230 V AC [included in M23, M43 & M54] M59 M60 K90 DC busbar system (Id = 1,840 A, 1x 100 x 10 mm) M82 Performance expansion for CU320-2 K94 1) M83 CU320-2 PN Control Unit (PROFINET) K95 DC busbar system (Id = 2,150 A, 2x 60 x 10 mm) dV/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter L07 DC busbar system (Id = 2,730 A, 2x 80 x 10 mm) M84 Motor reactor L08 DC busbar system (Id = 3,320 A, 2x 100 x 10 mm) M85 dV/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter L10 DC busbar system (Id = 3,720 A, 3x 80 x 10 mm) M86 Output circuit breaker (motorized) L34 DC busbar system (Id = 4,480 A, 3x 100 x 10 mm) M87 Lifting beam/eye bolts M90 CU320-2 DP Control Unit (PROFIBUS DP) DC disconnect with precharge circuit for the associated DC bus capacitance (includes M60) Enclosure space heater 25/125 kW braking unit (for frame size FX) for line voltages of 380 ... 480 V and 660 ... 690 V 50/250 kW braking unit (for frame size GX/HX/JX) for line voltages of 380 ... 480 V and 660 ... 690 V L37 2) L55 UL listing per UL508A [requires M23, M43 or M54] U90 L61 cUL listing per UL508A for Canada [requires M23, M43 or M54, plus T58] L62 Special enclosure paint color [specify color] Y09 Assembly into transport sections [specify sections] Y11 U91 25/125 kW braking unit (for frame size FX) for line voltages of 500 ... 600 V L64 1-line label for customer text, 40 x 80 mm [specify text] Y31 50/250 kW braking unit (for frame size GX/HX/JX) for line voltages of 500 ... 600 V L65 2-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text] Y32 4-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text] Y33 Customer drawings in dxf format D02 Advance copy of customer documentation (pdf) D14 Documentation English/French D58 Nameplate English/French T58 Visual Inspection by customer F03 Witnessed or observed function test without motor F71 Witnessed or observed test incl. high-voltage and insulation test F77 Customer specific test (on request) F97 1) 2) 3) Only in combination with option K90 or K95. These options are not yet UL listed and cannot be included in a UL listed line-up. Only in combination with option L37. 4/16 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Chassis Format Options Option combination matrix for Motor Modules Chassis format The following tables provide an overview of possible and impermissible combinations of standard options. Please refer to the descriptions of options for more information. Custom configurations may be possible to provide combinations not available as standard – please contact the factory. Combination is possible – Combination is not possible Electrical Options G20 G33 G33 K46 K48 K50 K51 – – – – – K88 K90 K95 L07 L08 L10 L34 L37 L61 L62 L64 L65 – G20 – K46 – K48 K50 – – K51 – – 4 – – K88 – K90 – K95 – L07 L08 – L10 – – – – – – – L34 – L37 – – L61 – – – – – – L62 – – L64 – – – – L65 – – – – – – Mechanical Options M06 M07 M07 M21 M23 M43 M54 M59 M60 – – – – – – – – M90 Y11 U90 U91 – – – – – M06 – M21 M23 – M43 – – M54 – – – – – – M59 M60 – – M90 – Y11 U90 – – U91 – – – – Siemens D21.7 – 2013 4/17 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Chassis Format Options DC busbar system Options Within a line-up, all DC bus needs to be of the same width (60, 80 or 100 mm). DC bus current ratings may vary within a line-up by using either a single busbar, or two or three busbars in parallel per pole. The following table indicates which busbar options for the various cabinet modules may be combined within a line-up. Combination is possible – Combination is not possible M80 M81 M82 – – M80 4 M81 – M82 – – – – M83 M84 – M85 – M86 – M87 – M83 – – – Y31 Y31 Y32 Y33 – – Y32 – Y33 – – 4/18 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – M87 – – – – Label Options M86 – – – – M85 – – – – M84 – – SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Booksize Formats Overview Motor Modules are also available as Booksize Cabinet Kits at 380 V to 480 V (DC bus voltage 510 V to 720 V). The following Motor Modules are available: •Single Motor Modules for power ratings of 5 to 100 HP (4.8 kW to 82 kW at 400 V) to feed a single motor 4 Design Motor Modules booksize format are configured as Booksize Cabinet Kits, which are then factory mounted in Booksize Base Cabinets that contain all components and wiring necessary for operation (Kits cannot be purchased separately, only mounted in a Booksize Base Cabinet). Several Booksize Cabinet Kits can be installed in one Booksize Base Cabinet. The number of Booksize Cabinet Kits that can be installed in a Booksize Base Cabinet is determined solely on the basis of the available cabinet width and the width of the kits, which in turn depends on the power rating. The number of Booksize Kits mounted in a specific Base Cabinet must be specified in plain text. Each Booksize Motor Module is individually connected to the DC bus of the SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module via fixed mounted fuses. (The DC bus integrated in the Booksize modules is not used). The basic version of a Booksize Cabinet Kit comprises the following components: •Motor Module, booksize format •Fuses for each Motor Module •Customer terminal interface -X55.1 located in the connection area of the Booksize Base Cabinet •Shield connection plate •Complete electrical interconnections to the Booksize Base Cabinet Interfaces Booksize Base Cabinets can be provided as NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosures without additional temperature derating. However, note that there are some differences between Booksize and Chassis format Motor Modules with respect to technical data and derating. Please refer to the engineering information section 7. Selection and ordering data Rated Rated Rated Single Motor Module Inpower at power output stall. Booksize Cabinet Kit 460 (400) V at 460 V current IN width kW HP A Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC) 5.5 (4.8) 5 9 11 (9.7) 10 18 18 (16) 20 30 28 (24) 30 45 37 (32) 40 60 53 (46) 60 85 82 (71) 100 132 mm Order No. 100 100 100 200 200 200 300 6SL3720-1TE21-0AU3 6SL3720-1TE21-8AU3 6SL3720-1TE23-0AU3 6SL3720-1TE24-5AU3 6SL3720-1TE26-0AU3 6SL3720-1TE28-5AU3 6SL3720-1TE31-3AU3 For all Motor Module Booksize Cabinet Kits: SCCR 65 kA* Booksize base cabinets for installation of booksize kits. Usable install. width Weight Dimensions for base Booksize Base approx. IP20 design Cabinet (W x D x H) 1) mm lb [kg] inch [mm] Order No. Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC) 31.5 x 23.6 x 86.6 375 6SL3720-1TX38-0AU3 600 [170] [800 x 600 x 2,200] 47.2 x 23.6 x 86.6 520 6SL3720-1TX41-2AU3 1,000 [240] [1,200 x 600 x 2,200] 1) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. * Note that UL listing of Motor Module Booksize Cabinet Kits is not yet complete. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 4/19 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Booksize Formats Block diagram Motor Modules are controlled by the CU320-2 DP or CU320-2 PN Control Unit. By selecting option codes K90 or K95 the Control Unit is included in the motor module cabinet, complete with the DRIVE-CLiQ cable connecting it to the motor module. However, if the Control Unit is also used to control other motor modules, or if the Control Unit is to be mounted separately, the DRIVE-CLiQ cables are excluded need to be added by others. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. Cabinet Module (Booksize Base Cabinet) DC busbar = + M Customer terminal block 24 V DC Internal power supply -X21 1 2 3 4 -X55.1 1) 2) Fan -X12 1 2 +Temp -Temp EP +24 V EP M1 DRIVE-CLiQ socket 2 ~ DRIVE-CLiQ socket 0 DCP DCN LEDs 4 X201 X202 DRIVE-CLiQ socket 1 X200 READY DC LINK -X1 = Booksize Cabinet Kit Single Motor Module ~ U2 V2 M 3~ W2 PE 3) -F24 Auxiliary power supply: -X100 1 2 3 4 5 6 380 - 480 V 1 ph AC or 500 - 690 V 1 ph AC G_D213_EN_00063c 230 V AC 24 V DC 1) Connection of temperature sensor for motors without DRIVE-CliQ interface. 2) Required for Safety Integrated. 3) Fan insert for rated output current of 132 A. Connection example of a Single Motor Module, Booksize Cabinet Kit format 4/20 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Booksize Formats Technical data Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC Single Motor Module Booksize Cabinet Kit 6SL37206SL37201TE21-0AU3 1TE21-8AU3 6SL37201TE23-0AU3 kW [HP] kW kW [HP] kW 5.5 [5] 4.8 5 [5] 4.1 11 [10] 9.7 9 [10] 8.2 18 [20] 16 15 [15] 13.7 A A A 9 18 30 7.7 15.3 25.5 18 36 56 A 11 22 36 A 0.85 0.85 0.9 110 220 710 kHz kHz 4 4 4 16 16 16 kW 0.08 [0.08] Rated power • For I L (60 Hz, 460 V) 1) 2) • For I L (50 Hz, 400 V) 1) • For I H (60 Hz, 460 V) 1) 2) • For I H (50 Hz, 400 V) 1) Output current • Rated current I N A • Base load current I H 3) • Maximum current I max A DC bus current 4) Current demand • 24V DC DC bus capacitance F 4 Pulse frequency 5) • Rated • Maximum (with derating) Power loss, max. 6) • At 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V] Cooling air requirement Sound pressure level L pA (1m) at 60 [50] Hz Motor connection U2, V2, W2 • Conductor size, max. 0.165 [0.165] 0.29 [0.29] cfm [m3/s] 17 [0.008] 17 [0.008] 34 [0.016] dB(A) < 60 72 < 60 Terminal Terminal Terminal #10 AWG #10 AWG #10 AWG 230 [70] 328 [100] 328 [100] 492 [150] Output cable length, max. 7) • Shielded • Unshielded Weight, approx. ft [m] ft [m] 164 [50] 246 [75] lb [kg] 44 [20] 44 [20] 48 [21.9] Installation width Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) per UL508A mm 100 100 100 kA 65 65 65 power in kW is of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor with an FLA of I L or I H at the listed voltage and frequency. power in HP is based on NEC table 430-150. Note that HP ratings are provided as a guide only, for standard 2, 4 or 6 pole motors. Actual motor currents may be higher, especially for motors with 8 or more poles. 3) The base load current IH is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 150 % for 60 s or 160 % for 10 s. 4) For a DC bus voltage of 600 V DC. 5) Information regarding the correlation between the pulse frequency and max. output current/output frequency is provided in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. 6) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. 7) Sum of lengths of all motor cables. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. 1) Rated 2) Rated Siemens D21.7 – 2013 4/21 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Booksize Formats Technical data Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC Single Motor Module Booksize Cabinet Kit 6SL3720- 6SL37206SL37201TE24-5AU3 1TE26-0AU3 1TE28-5AU3 6SL37201TE31-3AU3 kW [HP] kW kW [HP] kW 28 [30] 24 24 [25] 21 37 [40] 32 32 [40] 28 53 [60] 46 42 [50] 37 82 [100] 71 65 [75] 57 A A A 45 60 85 132 38 52 68 105 85 113 141 210 A 54 72 102 158 A 1.2 1.2 1.5 1.5 1,175 1,410 1,880 2,820 kHz kHz 4 4 4 4 16 16 16 16 kW 0.43 [0.43] Rated power • For I L (60 Hz, 460 V) 1) 2) • For I L (50 Hz, 400 V) 1) • For I H (60 Hz, 460 V) 1) 2) • For I H (50 Hz, 400 V) 1) Output current • Rated current I N A 4 • Base load current I H 3) • Maximum current I max A DC bus current I d 4) Current demand • 24V DC DC bus capacitance F Pulse frequency 5) • Rated • Maximum (with derating) Power loss, max. 6) • At 60 Hz 475V [50 Hz 400V] Cooling air requirement Sound pressure level L pA (1m) at 60 [50] Hz Motor connection U2, V2, W2 • Conductor size, max. 0.59 [0.59] 0.75 [0.75] 1.25 [1.25] cfm [m3/s] 65.7 [0.031] 65.7 [0.031] 93.2 [0.044] 305 [0.144] dB(A) < 65 < 60 < 73 < 65 Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal #6 AWG #6 AWG 2/0 2/0 328 [100] 492 [150] 328 [100] 492 [150] 328 [100] 492 [150] Output cable length, max. 7) • Shielded • Unshielded Weight, approx. ft [m] ft [m] 328 [100] 492 [150] lb [kg] 60 [27] 60 [27] 73 [33] 90 [41] Installation width Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) per UL508A mm 200 200 200 300 kA 65 65 65 65 power in kW is of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor with an FLA of I L or I H at the listed voltage and frequency. power in HP is based on NEC table 430-150. Note that HP ratings are provided as a guide only, for standard 2, 4 or 6 pole motors. Actual motor currents may be higher, especially for motors with 8 or more poles. 3) The base load current IH is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 150 % for 60 s or 160 % for 10 s. 4) For a DC bus voltage of 600 V DC. 5) Information regarding the correlation between the pulse frequency and max. output current/output frequency is provided in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. 6) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions. 7) Sum of lengths of all motor cables. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. 1) Rated 2) Rated 4/22 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Booksize Formats Options The table below lists the available options for Motor Modules booksize format (refer to Description of the Options for details). Motor Module Booksize Cabinet Kits Available Options CBC10 Communication Board (CANbus) CBE20 Communication Board (Ethernet) Safety license for 1 to 5 axes AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel installed in the cabinet door SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module Additional SMC30 Sensor Module Terminal interface for the Safe Torque Off and Safe Stop 1 safety functions TM54F Terminal Module CU320-2 DP Control Unit (PROFIBUS DP) Performance expansion for CU320-2 CU320-2 PN Control Unit (PROFINET) Motor reactor 2 motor reactors in series DC disconnect with pre-charge circuit for the associated DC bus capacitance (includes M60) UL listing per UL508A cUL listing per UL508A for Canada Option code G20 1) G33 1) K01 to K05 K08 1) K46 K48 K50 K51 K52 K82 K87 K90 K94 1) K95 L08 L09 L37 2) U90 3) U91 3) Booksize Base Cabinets Available Options Enclosure space heater Base (plinth) 100mm Base (plinth) 200mm (cable marshalling space) Enclosure NEMA 1 (IP21) Enclosure NEMA 1 filtered (IP23) [includes M60] Side panel (right) Side panel (left) Enclosure IP43 [includes M60] Enclosure NEMA 12 (ventilated) (IP54) [includes M60] Solid cabinet door (no ventilation openings, air inlet through floor) EMC shield bus (for connecting cable screens) DC busbar system (Id = 1,170 A, 1x 60 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 1,500 A, 1x 80 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 1,840 A, 1x 100 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 2,150 A, 2x 60 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 2,730 A, 2x 80 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 3,320 A, 2x 100 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 3,720 A, 3x 80 x 10 mm) DC busbar system (Id = 4,480 A, 3x 100 x 10 mm) Lifting beam/eye bolts UL listing per UL508A [requires M23, M43 or M54] cUL listing per UL508A for Canada [requires M23, M43 or M54, plus T58] Special enclosure paint color [specify color] Assembly into transport sections [specify sections] 1-line label for customer text, 40 x 80 mm [specify text] 2-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text] 4-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text] Customer drawings in dxf format Advance copy of customer documentation (pdf) Documentation English/French Nameplate English/French Visual Inspection by customer Witnessed or observed function test without motor Witnessed or observed test incl. high-voltage and insulation test Customer specific test (on request) 1) Only in combination with option K90 or K95. 2) Option L37 is not UL listed and cannot be included 3) Consult factory for availability of these options. Option code L55 M06 M07 M21 M23 M26 M27 M43 M54 M59 M70 M80 M81 M82 M83 M84 M85 M86 M87 M90 U90 3) U91 3) Y09 Y11 Y31 Y32 Y33 D02 D14 D58 T58 F03 F71 F77 F97 in a UL listed line-up. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 4/23 4 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Booksize Formats Options Option combination matrix for Booksize Cabinet Kits and Booksize Base Cabinets The following tables provide an overview of possible and impermissible combinations of standard options. Please refer to the descriptions of options for more information. Custom configurations may be possible to provide combinations not available as standard – please contact the factory. Combination is possible – Combination is not possible Electrical Options for Booksize Cabinet Kits G20 G20 4 G33 K46 K48 K50 K51 – – – – K90 K95 L08 L09 – G33 – K46 K48 – K50 – – K51 – – – – K90 – K95 – L08 – L09 – Mechanical Options M06 M21 M23 M43 M54 M59 M60 – – – – – – – – M90 Y11 U90 1) U91 1) – M06 M07 M07 – M21 M23 – M43 – – M54 – – – – – – – – – – M59 M60 – – M90 – Y11 U901) – – U911) – – 1) Consult 4/24 factory for availability of these options. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 – – SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules Booksize Formats Options DC busbar system Options Within a line-up, all DC bus needs to be of the same width (60, 80 or 100 mm). DC bus current ratings may vary within a lineup by using either a single busbar, or two or three busbars in parallel per pole. The following table indicates which busbar options for the various cabinet modules may be combined within a line-up. Combination is possible – Combination is not possible M80 M81 M82 – – M80 M81 – M82 – – – – M83 M84 – M85 – M86 – M87 – M83 – M86 M87 – – – – – – – – – – – – M85 – – – – M84 – – – – – – – – – – – 4 – – – Label Options Y31 Y31 Y32 – Y33 – Y32 Y33 – – – – Siemens D21.7 – 2013 4/25 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Braking Modules (Chassis Mounted) Overview Braking Modules are required to remove energy from the DC bus to brake overhauling loads if the Line Module is not capable of regenerative operation, or to enable electrical braking even in the event of a power supply failure. 4 Braking modules mounted inside chassis Matching braking resistors For lower braking powers, Braking Modules are available for mounting inside chassis format Line and Motor Modules (options L61 to L65), and they are cooled by the fans on these modules. The Braking Module includes the power electronics and the associated control circuit. The supply voltage for the electronics is taken from the DC bus. The Braking Module works autonomously from the drive control. During operation, the DC bus energy is converted to heat in a matching external braking resistor which is supplied as a loose component for external mounting by others. Each braking module requires a matching braking resistor. The maximum permissible cable length between the Braking Module and braking resistor is 330 ft (100 m). The braking resistor is monitored on the basis of the duty cycle. A temperature switch (NC contact) is also fitted. This responds when the maximum permissible temperature is exceeded and can be evaluated by a controller. Several Braking Modules can be operated in parallel, but a separate braking resistor must be connected to each Braking Module. The activation threshold voltage of the Braking Module can be adjusted by means of a DIP switch. The braking power values specified in the technical specifications apply to the upper activation threshold. 4/26 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 For additional information, please refer to the Description of the Options (L61, L62, L64, L65), or the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Braking Modules (Chassis Mounted) Technical data Braking Module and Braking Resistor Option code L61 L62 L64 L65 L61 L62 Motor or Line Modules frame size FX/FB GX/GB, HX, JX FX/FB GX/GB, HX, JX FX/FB GX/GB, HX, JX Line voltage DC bus voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC 510 … 720 V DC 500 … 600 V 3 ph. AC 675 … 900 V DC 660 … 690 V 3 ph. AC 890 … 1,035 V DC Braking Module Rated power • Rated power P DB kW 25 50 25 50 25 50 • Peak power P 15 kW 125 250 125 250 125 250 • Power P 20 kW 100 200 100 200 100 200 • Power P 40 kW 50 100 50 100 50 100 Activation thresholds (adjustable via DIP switch) V 774 (factory setting) or 673 967 (factory setting) or 841 1,153 (factory setting) or 1,070 M8 nut M8 nut M8 nut M8 nut M8 nut M8 nut #2 AWG #1 AWG #2 AWG #1 AWG #2 AWG #1 AWG 4.4 (± 7.5 %) 2.2 (± 7.5 %) 6.8 (± 7.5 %) 3.4 (± 7.5 %) 9.8 (± 7.5 %) 4.9 (± 7.5 %) Resistor Connection • Max. wire size AWG/MCM 4 Braking Resistor Resistance Rated power • Rated power P DB (continuous) kW 25 50 25 50 25 50 • Peak power P 15 (maximum) kW 125 250 125 250 125 250 • Power P 20 kW 100 200 100 200 100 200 • Power P 40 kW 50 100 50 100 50 100 Current, max. A 189 378 153 305 125 255 Power connection M10 stud M10 stud M10 stud M10 stud M10 stud M10 stud Enclosure IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 inch [mm] 29 [740] 32 [810] 29 [740] 32 [810] 29 [740] 32 [810] • Height inch [mm] 24 [600] 52 [1,325] 24 [600] 52 [1,325] 24 [600] 52 [1,325] • Depth inch [mm] 19 [486] 19 [486] 19 [486] 19 [486] 19 [486] 19 [486] Weight, approx. lb [kg] 110 [50] 265 [120] 110 [50] 265 [120] 110 [50] 265 [120] Enclosure dimensions, nominal • Width Siemens D21.7 – 2013 4/27 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules used as Braking Modules Overview Note that for Motor Modules operating as Braking Modules the response time at about 4 to 5 ms is approximately twice as long as of the smaller Braking Modules designed for mounting in chassis (and of the Central Braking Modules offered in the IEC product spectrum of SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules). For applications that require a very fast braking response time it may therefore be necessary to combine both types of Braking Modules in one system. Please consult the factory when engineering such an application. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. Common DC Bus 4 Motor Module For applications requiring high or very high braking powers, Motor Modules in Chassis format can be configured as 3-phase Braking Modules. When used as a braking module, three identical braking BrakinginModules (Chassis Mounted) resistors a wye connection are connected to the output of the Motor Module instead of a motor. These resistors form a symmetrical resistive load. Three individual resistors in separate enclosures or a symmetrical 3-phase resistor in one enclosure may be used. (It is not permissible to use asymmetrical or single phase resistor arrangements). SINAMICS S120 firmware (Version 4.4 and up) includes standard functionality to parameterize a motor module for operation with a braking resistor. Settings include the resistance of the braking resistor, the activation threshold voltage and the output voltage. Motor Module used as Braking Module External Braking Resistor 3* R BR M 3 Due to the large range of braking powers and as Braking Resistors at high and very high powers generally require special designs (for example, outdoor installation or water cooling), such resistors are not offered as standard components in this catalog. Please consult with specialized resistor manufacturers to select suitable components. Design The permissible output currents for application as Braking Modules (rated continuous I rated-Brake , and maximum Imax-Brake braking current) is provided on the following page. These values are based on the upper response thresholds, (i.e. to VDC-max = 774 V at line supply voltages of 380 V to 480 V and to VDC-max = 967 V (1158 V) at line supply voltages of 500 V to 600 (690) V. For other response thresholds, the braking power must be reduced in proportion to VDC-Brake. The braking power P Brake of a Motor Module operating as a Braking Module is proportional to the DC bus voltage during braking. This response threshold VDC-Brake can be freely selected, but should be limited to the range specified in the table below for the relevant line connection voltage. 4/28 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 Line voltage Threshold voltage range VDC-Brake 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC 673 … 774 V 500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC 841 … 967 V (1,070 … 1,158 V) The minimum cable length to the braking resistors is 33 ft. (10 m). If shorter cables are used, the motor module requires a motor reactor (option L08). The maximum cable length is 980 ft (300 m) with shielded cables and 1,480 ft (450 m) with unshielded cables, corresponding to the maximum cable lengths for Motor Modules used for their standard purpose. SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Motor Modules used as Braking Modules Technical data Braking power ratings below are provided as a guide only. Please refer to the SINAMICS Engineering Manual for additional information and details of calculations. Values are also dependant on the characteristics of braking resistors selected (such as tolerances and increase of resistance under load). Motor Module chassis format Rated output current (used as motor module) IN Motor Module used as Braking Module Continuous braking current I rated-Brake Maximum braking current I max-Brake Continuous braking power P rated-Brake1) Peak braking power P max-Brake1) Order No. [A] [A] [A] [kW] [kW] Minimum braking resistance R BR-min 2) Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 510 … 650 V DC) 6SL3720-1TE32-1AU3 210 210 307 197 288 1.02 6SL3720-1TE32-6AU3 260 255 368 239 345 0.85 6SL3720-1TE33-1AU3 310 290 424 272 398 0.74 6SL3720-1TE33-8AU3 380 340 497 319 466 0.63 6SL3720-1TE35-0AU3 490 450 657 422 617 0.48 6SL3720-1TE36-1AU3 605 545 797 511 748 0.39 6SL3720-1TE37-5AU3 745 680 993 638 932 0.32 6SL3720-1TE38-4AU3 840 800 1,171 751 1,099 0.27 6SL3720-1TE41-0AU3 985 900 1,316 845 1,235 0.24 6SL3720-1TE41-2AU3 1,260 1,215 1,779 1,140 1,669 0.18 6SL3720-1TE41-4AU3 1,405 1,365 1,996 1,281 1,873 0.16 4 Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 675 … 810 (930) V DC) 6SL3720-1TG28-5AU3 85 85 120 99 (119) 140 (168) 3.26 (3.90) 6SL3720-1TG31-0AU3 100 100 142 117 (140) 166 (199) 2.75 (3.30) 6SL3720-1TG31-2AU3 120 115 165 134 (161) 194 (232) 2.37 (2.84) 6SL3720-1TG31-5AU3 150 144 204 168 (202) 239 (286) 1.92 (2.29) 6SL3720-1TG31-8AU3 175 175 255 205 (246) 299 (358) 1.53 (1.84) 6SL3720-1TG32-2AU3 215 215 312 252 (302) 366 (438) 1.25 (1.50) 6SL3720-1TG32-6AU3 260 255 368 299 (358) 432 (517) 1.06 (1.27) 6SL3720-1TG33-3AU3 330 290 422 340 (407) 494 (592) 0.93 (1.11) 6SL3720-1TG34-1AU3 410 400 585 469 (562) 686 (821) 0.67 (0.80) 6SL3720-1TG34-7AU3 465 450 656 528 (632) 769 (921) 0.60 (0.71) 6SL3720-1TG35-8AU3 575 515 752 604 (723) 882 (1,056) 0.52 (0.62) 6SL3720-1TG37-4AU3 735 680 985 797 (955) 1,155 (1,383) 0.40 (0.48) 6SL3720-1TG38-1AU3 810 805 1,178 944 (1,130) 1,381 (1,654) 0.33 (0.40) 6SL3720-1TG38-8AU3 910 905 1,313 1,061 (1,271) 1,539 (1,843) 0.30 (0.36) 6SL3720-1TG41-0AU3 1,025 1,020 1,493 1,196 (1,432) 1,750 (2,096) 0.26 (0.31) 6SL3720-1TG41-3AU3 1,270 1,230 1,787 1,442 (1,727) 2,095 (2,509) 0.22 (0.26) 1) Power at upper (maximum) response threshold voltage: For line voltage 380 … 480 V = 774 V, for 500 … 600 (690) V = 967 (1,158) V. Power ratings reduce for lower threshold setting. 2) Minimum braking resistance (cold state) per phase (i.e. per resistor, using three resistors in wye connection). Calculations must make allowance for the increase in resistance under load (up to approx. 30%). Siemens D21.7 – 2013 4/29 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Notes 4 4/30 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Auxiliary Modules,5Options 5 5/2 Auxiliary Power Supply Modules Overview Design Selection and ordering data Block diagram Technical data Options 5/6 Custom Cabinet Modules Custom options Custom Cabinet Modules Custom Cabinet Module line-ups Empty Cabinet Modules 5/8 Integration Engineering Overview Selection and ordering data Options 5/9 Description of Options Communication & control options +G.., +K.. Electrical options +L.. Mechanical options +M.. Other options +P.., +U.., +Y.. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Auxiliary Power Supply Modules Overview Overview Design The Auxiliary Power Supply Module is supplied from the same voltage level as the main power supply to the line-up.. The standard version contains the following components: •Circuit breaker disconnect with auxiliary contacts for external monitoring •Transformer with 230 V output voltage •SITOP 24 V DC power supply •Ground bus, including jumper for looping through to the next Cabinet Module •The module outputs three fused auxiliary voltages: - 24 V DC for the electronics power supply - 230 V 1 phase AC to supply 230 V loads - 380 V to 690 V 1 phase AC to supply the equipment fans The auxiliary voltages are distributed throughout the line-up via the pre-wired 6-pole auxiliary power supply system, which includes plug connections for looping through from one Cabinet Module to the next. 5 Selection and ordering data An Auxiliary Power Supply Module is a convenient central source of the entire auxiliary and control power supplies (line voltage, 240 V 1 ph. AC and 24 V DC) for a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module line-up. It is generally supplied by a feeder separate from the main feeder(s) to the Line Connection Module(s) of the line up. Equipment connected to the auxiliary power supply system includes the fans of the SINAMICS S120 power modules, and the control equipment. Since it is fed from a source separate from the main supply, 24 V DC power can be provided to the control electronics even if the DC bus is not charged, for example to maintain PROFIBUS or PROFINET communication. Alternatives to Auxiliary Power Supply Modules An Auxiliary Power Supply Module is not essential; there are various alternative methods of providing auxiliary power to a line-up: •External auxiliary and control power provided by the customer, for example from an MCC and/or UPS •For smaller line-ups, it may be possible to include the auxiliary power supplies in the Line Connection Module (by selecting option code K76) •Another alternative is to include only the source of auxiliary power for the cooling fans in the Line Connection Module (option code K70). The 230 V AC and 24 V DC control supplies would then be provided from an external source, for example from a secure supply with batteries 5/2 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 Line side supply current rating (380 … 600 (690) V 3 phase AC) Single Motor Module Booksize Cabinet Kit A Order No. 125 6SL3700-0MX14-0AU3 160 6SL3700-0MX16-3AU3 200 6SL3700-0MX21-0AU3 250 6SL3700-0MX21-4AU3 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Auxiliary Power Supply Modules Block diagram Cabinet Module Auxiliary Power Supply Module -Q1 -Q4 -X45 1 2 3 4 L1 L2 L3 -Q3 -Q2 -T2 -X47 1 2 3 4 5 11 12 13 Fuse monitoring 14 15 16 17 18 ~ = 230 V AC 24 V DC G_D213_EN_00067b 380 - 480 V 1 ph. AC or 500 - 600 (690) V 1 ph. AC -F24 Auxiliary power supply: -X101 1 2 3 4 5 6 Block diagram, Auxiliary Power Supply Module Siemens D21.7 – 2013 5/3 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Auxiliary Power Supply Modules Technical data Auxiliary Power Supply Modules 6SL37000MX14-0AU3 6SL37000MX16-3AU3 6SL37000MX21-0AU3 6SL37000MX21-4AU3 A 125 160 200 250 AWG/MCM 300 MCM 300 MCM 300 MCM 300 MCM - to auxiliary power supply A 63 80 100 100 - to customer terminal -X45 A 50 63 80 80 - to auxiliary power supply A 6 10 10 20 - to customer terminal -X45 A 8 10 10 20 - to auxiliary power supply A 20 40 80 80 Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) per UL508A kA 100 100 100 100 • Connection -X45 AWG/MCM #6 AWG #6 AWG #6 AWG #6 AWG • Connection -X47 AWG/MCM #14 AWG #14 AWG #14 AWG #14 AWG Cooling air requirement cfm N/A - Natural convection N/A - Natural convection N/A - Natural convection N/A - Natural convection Ground (PE) connection Ground bus Ground bus Ground bus Ground bus Enclosure (base design) IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 inch [mm] 24 [600] 24 [600] 24 [600] 24 [600] Line supply current rating (380 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC) Line side power connection • Wire size, max. Current carrying capacity, max. • Load connection 380 ... 690 V AC • Load connection 230 V 1 ph. AC 5 • Load connection 24 V DC Wire size, max. Enclosure dimensions • Width 1) inch [mm] 87 [2,200] 87 [2,200] 87 [2,200] 87 [2,200] • Depth inch [mm] 24 [600] 24 [600] 24 [600] 24 [600] Weight approx. lb [kg] 375 [170] 400 [180] 465 [210] 530 [240] • Height 1) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21)and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure. 5/4 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Auxiliary Power Supply Modules Options The table below lists the available options for Motor Modules chassis format (refer to Description of the Options for details). Booksize Base Cabinets Available Options Option code Enclosure space heater L55 Base (plinth) 100mm M06 Base (plinth) 200mm (cable marshalling space) M07 Enclosure NEMA 1 (IP21) M21 Enclosure NEMA 1 filtered (IP23) [includes M60] M23 Side panel (right) M26 Side panel (left) M27 Enclosure IP43 [includes M60] M43 Enclosure NEMA 12 (ventilated) (IP54) [includes M60] M54 Solid cabinet door (no ventilation openings, air inlet through floor) M59 EMC shield bus (for connecting cable screens) M70 DC busbar system (Id = 1,170 A, 1x 60 x 10 mm) M80 DC busbar system (Id = 1,500 A, 1x 80 x 10 mm) M81 DC busbar system (Id = 1,840 A, 1x 100 x 10 mm) M82 DC busbar system (Id = 2,150 A, 2x 60 x 10 mm) M83 DC busbar system (Id = 2,730 A, 2x 80 x 10 mm) M84 DC busbar system (Id = 3,320 A, 2x 100 x 10 mm) M85 DC busbar system (Id = 3,720 A, 3x 80 x 10 mm) M86 DC busbar system (Id = 4,480 A, 3x 100 x 10 mm) M87 Lifting beam/eye bolts M90 UL listing per UL508A [requires M23, M43 or M54] U90 cUL listing per UL508A for Canada [requires M23, M43 or M54, plus T58] U91 Special enclosure paint color [specify color] Y09 Assembly into transport sections [specify sections] Y11 1-line label for customer text, 40 x 80 mm [specify text] Y31 2-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text] Y32 4-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text] Y33 Customer drawings in dxf format D02 Advance copy of customer documentation (pdf) D14 Documentation English/French D58 Nameplate English/French T58 Visual Inspection by customer F03 Witnessed or observed function test without motor F71 Witnessed or observed test incl. high-voltage and insulation test F77 Customer specific test (on request) F97 5 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 5/5 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Auxiliary Power Supply Modules Options Option combination matrix for Auxiliary Power Supply Modules The following tables provide an overview of possible and impermissible combinations of standard options. Please refer to the descriptions of options for more information. Custom configurations may be possible to provide combinations not available as standard – please contact the factory. Combination is possible – Combination is not possible Mechanical Options M06 M07 M07 M21 M23 M54 M59 M60 M90 Y11 U90 U91 – – – – – – M21 5 M43 – M06 – – – – – – – M23 – M43 – – M54 – – – – – – M59 M60 – – M90 – Y11 U90 – – U91 – – – – DC busbar system Options Within a line-up, all DC bus needs to be of the same width (60, 80 or 100 mm). DC bus current ratings may vary within a line-up by using either a single busbar, or two or three busbars in parallel per pole. The following table indicates which busbar options for the various cabinet modules may be combined within a line-up. M80 M81 M82 – – M80 M81 – M82 – – – – M83 M84 – M85 – M86 – M87 – M83 – – – Y31 Y31 Y32 – Y33 – 5/6 Y32 Y33 – – – – Siemens D21.7 – 2013 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – M87 – – – – Label Options M86 – – – – M85 – – – – M84 – – SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Custom Cabinet Modules Customization of Cabinet Modules Standard Cabinet Modules with their extensive range of standard options cover a broad range of applications and designs, but there are invariably additional demands to meet project, site or application specific needs. Siemens offers a range of approaches to address such needs, which includes: Custom Options Custom options are modifications to standard Cabinet Modules and may include, for example: • Top cable entry for motor cables: Depending on the frame size and rating of the Motor Module, and the installed options, connections for top entry of motor cables can sometimes be installed inside the standard cabinet, sometimes an additional cabinet may be required. • DC bus transition for back-to-back arrangement of Cabinet Modules: A range of DC bus transition designs has been supplied, to best match specific designs and site layouts. Transition connection can be provided in the middle or at the ends of a line-up, sometimes inside existing cabinet modules, sometimes using additional cabinets, or even inside a box bolted to the line-up. • Additional control or power components These may include items such as I/O modules for digital and/or analog inputs and outputs, or feeders for motor blower circuits. Custom Cabinet Modules Custom Cabinet Modules for both power and control circuits are designed, built and tested in the factory. For instance: • Contactor and switching Modules A Motor Module may be switched to various motors, for example processes powered by specific motors run at different times, or if individual motors are only briefly used during the day, then costs and space can be saved by using just one inverter with output switches. One such application is pump drives on tankers where various compartments in the ship are emptied one after the other. Another application involves container cranes, where a single inverter may feed motors for hoisting and for the boom. • Motor Protection Panel (MPP) Modules Applications such as roller tables in the metals industry may have multiple small motors running on a single Motor Module (group drives). Motor Protection Panels include control and protection devices for, and cable connections for power distribution to multiple motors connected to a common Motor Module. • Control Unit Cabinet Modules There are standard options for including control units and encoder modules in the Motor Modules. However, the preference may be to install this control equipment in a central control cabinet that does not contain any power circuits and dangerous voltages associated with them. Such an arrangement is easily implemented due to the great flexibility provided by the DRIVE-CLiQ topology of SINAMICS S120. Custom Cabinet Module line-ups It is also possible to provide completely custom line-ups, that would include design elements of the standard Cabinet Module range where advantageous. • SINAMICS S120 Liquid Cooled line-ups For adverse environments SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules can also be supplied in a liquid cooled version. The heat loss of the units is transferred to the cooling liquid and dissipated remotely, eliminating the need for air conditioning of an electrical room. Such line-ups include liquid-cooled Line and Motor Modules in the chassis format, combined with a cooling unit appropriately designed for the specific conditions. Empty Cabinet Modules Siemens customers and partners may wish to combine the advantages of predesigned, system tested high power standard Cabinet Modules with custom automation or control equipment of their own design, integrated into one single line-up. Siemens can provide empty Cabinet Modules for this purpose: • Empty Cabinet Modules Empty Cabinet Modules (without DC bus) would be located at one end of a line-up. These could be fitted with the auxiliary power distribution system used in the rest of the line up, or a back panel, if required. • Empty Cabinet Modules with DC bus. If a Cabinet Module is located in the middle of a line-up it would require the DC bus to run through it. The bus could be shrouded to isolate the interior of the cabinet from the power circuits. Alternatively, if additional equipment is to be connected to the common DC bus, Siemens can provide a fused DC feed. This is strongly recommended to ensure the integrity and short circuit protection of the complete system. In short, the possibilities of the SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules are endless. Please contact your local Siemens sales office to discuss your specific needs or obtain an offer. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 5/7 5 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Integration Engineering Overview Selection and ordering data SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules are all specified individually, based on an order number and associated option codes. Drawings and documentation (outline dimension and layout drawing, schematic, spare parts list) are provided for each individual Cabinet Module. The following standard engineering services can be ordered depending on the number of drives/axes included in an order. With option Y11 Cabinet Modules are grouped into transport sections. This is only a mechanical connection, the drawings are not affected. 5 As a default there is however no documentation for the complete line-up showing interconnections between Cabinet Modules. The reason is that the factory cannot deduce how the various cabinet modules are intended to function, based on the individual part no.’s. For example, there may be a number of Motor Modules with only some including a control unit, which could be connected in many different ways. One control unit could be used to control a number of power modules, each for a different motor or some power modules could be intended for parallel connection. And there is no way to tell which control unit is to be connected to which power module(s). Integration Engineering Order No. For 1 drive (also parallel connection) including the associated Line Modules, Sensor Modules, Terminal Modules etc. 6SL3780-0AA00-0AU0 For up to 3 drives (also parallel connection) including the associated Line Modules, Sensor Modules, Terminal Modules etc. 6SL3780-0AC00-0AU0 For up to 5 drives (also parallel connection) including the associated Line Modules, Sensor Modules, Terminal Modules etc. 6SL3780-0AE00-0AU0 For up to 10 drives (also parallel connection) including the associated Line Modules, Sensor Modules, Terminal Modules etc. 6SL3780-0AJ00-0AU0 “Integration Engineering” to integrate the individual cabinet modules into one functioning line-up can be provided, based on a detailed customer specification. Engineering services for larger drive systems is also available on request. The scope of delivery of the integration engineering is as follows: • Checking the combinations and options ordered, in relation to the device configurations. • Defining how the individual drive objects are to be connected, coordinated with the customer as necessary. • Checking the performance of the ordered CompactFlash card. • Installing the required DRIVE-CLiQ cables within the transport sections. Cables between the transport sections are connected at one end. • Higher-level documentation of the scope of delivery (outline dimension diagram of the line-up, schematics with interconnections, consolidated spare parts list). • Consolidation of the individual drawings, possibly shipping these to a delivery address different to that of the equipment. • Customer-specific system and location designations, coordinated with the customer/client. Options Note that in this context “Integration Engineering” is limited only to integrating individual Cabinet Modules into a line-up. This is not to be confused with integration of the drive line-up into the customer’s plant and interconnection to external equipment such as power supplies, motors and process control or automation equipment, which is outside the scope of supply of a Cabinet Module line-up! 5/8 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 The table below lists the options available for the order specific Integration Engineering (For details see Description of the options): Available Options Option code Customer drawings in dxf format D02 Advance copy of customer documentation (pdf) D14 Documentation English/French D58 When ordering Integration Engineering, the required documentation options should always be ordered together with the Integration Engineering (not to the individual Cabinet Modules). Specifying the documentation options for individual Cabinet Modules is only required if equipment is ordered without Integration Engineering. SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Description of Options Description of options Standard documentation • Customer drawings supplied with SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules are provided for each cabinet individually (unless Integration Engineering is ordered to provide system drawings) and are always job specific (showing the configuration actually supplied, options not provided are not shown). • All customer documentation is provided in electronic format on a CD, which ships inside the drive. All documents are in pdf format (Adobe Acrobat) and are supplied in English with a copy in Spanish (English/Spanish are the default languages for NEMA version Cabinet Modules with order number ending in “U3”. English/French is alternatively available by specifying option D58). In addition, a paper copy of the Safety and Transportation Guidelines and the Installation Check List are included too. D02 Customer drawings in dxf format F03, F71, F75, F77, F97 Witnessed (or observed) testing Order Description F03 Visual inspection by customer The scope of the inspection comprises: • Checking the enclosure type • Checking the equipment (components) • Checking the equipment identifiers • Checking the clearance and creepage distances • Checking the wires • Checking the customer documentation • Submitting the acceptance report • The checks are carried out with the drive deenergized F71 Witnessed function test of drive without motor The scope of the witnessed test comprises: • Visual inspection as per option F03 • Check of power supply • Check of protective and monitoring devices (simulation) • Check of fans • Precharging test • Functional test without connected motor • Submitting the acceptance report After the visual inspection with the drive switched off, the drive is connected to rated voltage. No current flows at the drive output. F77 Witnessed test incl. highvoltage and insulation test The scope of the acceptance comprises: • High-voltage test • Measurement of insulation resistance F97 Witnessed customer specific drive acceptance inspections/ tests (on request) If additional witnessed testing is desired over and above options F03 or F71, please provide a specification/ test plan for the factory to submit a quotation. Schematics, outline dimension and layout drawings will be provided in AutoCAD (dxf) on the CD (or as specified by other option codes). D14 Advance copy of customer documentation (pdf) To receive a copy of customer drawings earlier than with drive shipment, i.e. after order placement (typically within 2 weeks). If option code D02 is specified, the advance copy of the drawings will be supplied in dxf format too. D58 Documentation English/French Two copies of the documentation (drawings and manuals) will be provided on the CD (or as specified by other option codes), one in English and the other in French. code Siemens D21.7 – 2013 5/9 5 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Description of Options Description of options G20 CBC10 Communication Board CANopen The CBC10 communication board is used to interface the CU320-2 Control Unit of a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module to the CAN (Controller Area Network) protocol. The board’s driver software fulfills the standards of the following CANopen specification of the CiA organization (CAN in Automation): • Communication profiles in accordance with DS 301 • Drive profile in accordance with DSP 402 (in this case Profile Velocity Mode) • EDS (Electronic Data Sheet) in accordance with DSP 306 • Operating status signaling in accordance with DSP 305 5 Temperature values from the TM150 are available for further processing and for transmission to the process control system via bus communications. Note: TM150 inputs are not electrically isolated. Only temperature sensors isolated per IEC 61800-5-1 may be connected to terminals “+Temp” and “-Temp”. Failure to observe these instructions can result in electric shock! G56 Monitoring of precharge function This option provides for the drive controller to monitor the precharge function of Line Modules, as well as on Motor Modules in combination with option L37 (DC disconnect with precharge). If precharge is not completed in a preset time the precharge circuit is opened and a fault is signalled. The CBC10 Communication Board plugs into the option slot on the CU320-2 Control Unit. The CAN interface on the CBC10 has 2 SUB-D connections for input and output. K01 to K05 Safety license for 1 to 5 axes The CBC10 Communication Board can only be ordered in conjunction with a CU320-2 Control Unit (option K90 or K95). Note the CU320-2 has only one options slot for one communications or I/O module. Safety Integrated Basic Functions (STO, SS1, SBA) do not require a license. A license is, however, required for each axis using Safety Integrated Extended Functions. It is irrelevant which safety functions are used and how many. G33 CBE20 Communication Board Ethernet Option K01 includes the license for 1 axis, K02 for 2 axes, etc. up to option K05 for 5 axes. The CBE20 communication board connects the CU320-2 DP or CU320-2 PN Control Unit of a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module to an additional communications bus. The CBE20 can be parameterized to connect to either: • SINAMICS Link high speed peer-to-peer communications with other CBE20 modules plugged into the CU320-2 control units of other SINAMICS drives, up to 64 nodes. • PROFINET I/O network, 100 Mbit/s full-duplex, supports real-time classes RT (Real-Time) and IRT (Isochronous Real-Time). (Only one communication interface can be used in isochronous operation when operating the CBE20 in a CU320-2 DP or PN Control Unit). • EtherNet/IP (EtherNet Industrial Protocol) is an open standard predominantly used in the automation industry. EtherNet/IP is supported by the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA). The safety licenses can be optionally ordered retrospectively and loaded to the CompactFlash card. A license key can be generated via the WEB License Manager at: www.siemens.com/automation/license In addition, the CBE allows on a PROFINET or EtherNet/Inetwork: • Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication for engineering processes using the STARTER commissioning tool The CBE20 Communication Board plugs into the option slot on the CU320-2 Control Unit. It has 4x RJ45 Ethernet ports. Description of the CBE20 Communication Board Ethernet Chapter 6. G51 to G54 TM150 RTD Monitoring Module(s) Up to four TM150 may be mounted in a Line Connection Module: G51 = qty. 1x TM150, G52 = qty. 2x TM150, G53 = qty. 3x TM150, G54 = qty. 4x TM150. The TM150 RTD module is suitable for monitoring temperature sensors type Pt100 or Pt1000 (Platinum RTD 100 ohm or 1,000 ohm), KTY84, PTC thermistor or a temperature switch contact (NC). Up to 12 sensors in 2-wire connection or up to 6 sensors in 3- or 4-wire connection can be connected to one TM150. 5/10 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 K08 AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel, door mounted The AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel is an optional door mounted local user interface for a Cabinet Module. The AOP30 connects to a CU320-2 control unit via a serial link (RS232). Only one AOP30 can be connected to one CU320-2. Description of the AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel Chapter 6. K46 SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted The SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted connects to a resolver to simultaneously sense the speed and the rotor position angle of a motor, and make this information available to the regulator via the DRIVE-CLiQ interface. The following encoder signals can be evaluated: • 2-pole resolver • Multi-pole resolver The motor temperature can also be detected using KTY84-130 or PTC thermistors. Description of the SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted Chapter 6. SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Description of Options Description of options K48 SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted The SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted connects to an incremental encoder to simultaneously sense the speed and the rotor position angle of a motor, and make this information available to the regulator via the DRIVE-CLiQ interface. The following encoder signals can be evaluated: • Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 VPP • EnDat absolute encoder • SSI encoder with incremental signals sin/cos 1 VPP (firmware version 2.4 and later) The motor temperature can also be detected using KTY84-130 or PTC thermistors. Description of the SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted Chapter 6. K50 SMC30 Sensor Module for speed feedback The SMC30 sensor module is used to connect a speed feedback incremental encoder to the drive, and provide the actual speed signal to the regulator via the DRIVE-CLiQ interface. The following encoder signals can be evaluated: • Incremental encoders TTL/HTL with/without open-circuit detection (open-circuit detection is only available with bipolar signals) • SSI encoder with TTL/HTL incremental signals • SSI encoder without incremental signals The motor temperature can also be detected using a KTY84-130 sensor or PTC thermistors. Description of the SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted Panel Chapter 6. K51 VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module The VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module reads the voltage waveform at the drive output. This provides the flying restart function when the SINAMICS S120 drive is connected to a permanent magnet synchronous machine without encoder. Description of the VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module Chapter 6. K52 Additional SMC30 Sensor Module This option code is to add a second SMC30 sensor module (in addition to one specified by option K50). Two SMC30 with associated encoders are required for Safety Extended functions. K70 Auxiliary AC voltage supply in the Line Connection Module Cabinet Modules require auxiliary and control power supplies. The current demand for the various auxiliary voltages must be determined when configuring the line-up and can be supplied either from external sources, or from an Auxiliary Power Supply Module. Alternatively, for smaller line-ups option K70 provides only the line voltage auxiliary supply in the Line Connection Module to power mostly fans (230 V AC and 24 V DC will need to be provided from external sources). This arrangement allows the control system to operate independently even if the main power source for the line-up is disconnected). Option K70, provides the following auxiliary supplies: • Line voltage 380 V to 480 V or 500 V to 600 (690) V 1 phase AC (approx. 80 A) The auxiliary AC voltage supplies in the Line Connection Module connect to the auxiliary power supply system, from where they are distributed to the rest of the line-up. K76 Auxiliary AC & DC voltage supplies in the Line Connection Module Similar to option K70 above, option K76 provides both AC and DC auxiliary supplies in the Line Connection Module, as follows: • Line voltage 380 V to 480 V or 500 V to 600 (690) V 1 phase AC (approx. 80 A) • 230 V 1 phase AC (Line Connection Modules < 800 A: approx. 4 A, > 800 A: approx. 6 A) • 24 V DC (Line Connection Modules < 800 A: approx. 20 A, > 800 A: approx. 40 A) The auxiliary voltage supplies in the Line Connection Module connect to the auxiliary power supply system, from where they are distributed to the rest of the line-up. K82 Terminal interface for controlling the “Safe Torque Off” and “Safe Stop 1” safety functions This terminal interface offers a wide voltage range (24 V to 240 V DC or AC) for easy integration of the following Safety Integrated basic functions into the plant controls (terminology as defined in draft IEC 61800-5-2): • Safe Torque Off (STO) • Safe Stop 1 (SS1) (time-controlled) The integrated safety functions, starting from the Safety Integrated (SI) input terminals of the components (Control Unit and Motor Module), satisfy the requirements of IEC 61800-5-2, IEC 60204-1, ISO 13849-1 Category 3 (previously EN 954-1) for Performance Level (PL) d and IEC 61508 SIL 2. With option K82, the requirements specified in IEC 61800-5-2, IEC 60204-1, ISO 13849-1 Category 3 (previously EN 954-1) for Performance Level (PL) d and IEC 61508 SIL 2 are fulfilled. The Safety Integrated functions using option K82 are only available in conjunction with certified components and software versions. These Safety Integrated functions of SINAMICS are generally certified by independent institutes. An up-to-date list of certified components is available on request from your local Siemens office. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 5/11 5 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Description of Options Description of options K87 TM54F Terminal Module The TM54F Terminal Module provides fail safe digital inputs and outputs for hardwired control of the Safety Integrated extended functions (as opposed to control via bus communications with PROFIsafe). The TM54F must be connected directly to a Control Unit via DRIVE-CLiQ. Each Control Unit is uniquely assigned to one TM54F. Note: It is not permissible to connect Motor Modules or Line Modules to a TM54F. The TM54F has 4 fail safe digital outputs and 10 fail safe digital inputs. A fail-safe digital output consists of one 24 V DC switching output, an output switching to ground and one digital input to check the switching state. A fail-safe digital input consists of two digital inputs. K88 Safe Brake Adapter SBA, 230 V AC 5 Safe Brake Control (SBC) is a basic safety function that is used in safety-relevant applications, for example in presses or rolling mills. In the no-current state, the brake is applied to the drive motor shaft using spring force. The brake is released when current flows in it (low active). The Safe Brake Adapter 230 V AC is factory installed in the Cabinet Module. A source of power is connected to terminal -X12 on the Safe Brake Adapter. For control, a connection is established between the Safe Brake Adapter and the Control Interface Module in the factory using a wire harness. On the plant side, to control the brake, a connection must be made between terminal -X14 on the Safe Brake Adapter and the brake. Note: The safe brake adapter is not yet UL listed. Option K88 cannot be included in a UL listed line-up. K90 CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS) Control Unit Option K90 assigns a CU320-2 DP Control Unit to a Line Module or Motor Module. This control unit handles the communications, regulator and control functions. DRIVE-CLiQ is used to connect the CU320-2 to power modules and, if applicable, to additional I/O and sensor modules. The CU320-2 includes a PROFIBUS interface as standard for higher level bus communications. The full performance of the CU320-2 is only available on systems with performance expansion (option K94). Description of the CU320-2 Control Unit Chapter 6. K94 Performance expansion for CU320-2 Control Unit Options K90 and K95 include standard SINAMICS S120 firmware (without performance expansion) suitable for controlling up to 3 axes. The performance required from the CU320-2 DP Control Unit can be calculated using SIZER and is based on the number of connected Motor or Line Modules and system components, as well as the dynamic performance demanded. 5/12 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 With option K94, the CU320-2 Control Unit is provided with a CompactFlash card with performance expansion, which enables the full performance capabilities of the CU320-2 Control Unit to be utilized (control of up to 6 axes). In addition to the firmware, the CompactFlash card also contains licensing codes that are required to enable firmware options, such as performance expansion and the Safety Integrated Extended functions. (Additional licenses are required to utilize Safety Integrated extended functions, refer to option K01 to K05 above). K95 CU320-2 PN (PROFINET) Control Unit Option K95 assigns a CU320-2 PN Control Unit to a Line Module or Motor Module. This control unit handles the communications, regulator and control functions. DRIVE-CLiQ is used to connect the CU320-2 to power modules and, if applicable, to additional I/O and sensor modules. The CU320-2 includes a PROFINET interface as standard for higher level bus communications. The full performance of the CU320-2 is only available on systems with performance expansion (option K94). Description of the CU320-2 Control Unit Chapter 6. L07 dV/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter The dV/dt filter compact plus VPL (Voltage Peak Limiter) limits the voltage rate-of-rise dV/dt to values < 1600 V/µs, and the typical voltage peaks to the following values per the limit value curve A of IEC 60034-25, 2007: • < 1150 V at ULine < 575 V • < 1400 V at 660 V < ULine < 690 V Note that these dV/dt and peak voltage values exceed the allowable values for motors insulated to NEMA MG1 part 30. (The dV/dt filter compact plus VPL may be used with suitably insulated IEC motors. For motors insulated to NEMA MG1 part 30, the dV/dt filter plus VPL (option L10) should to be selected). The dV/dt filter compact plus VPL is designed for the following maximum motor cable lengths: • Shielded cables: 328 ft [100 m] • Unshielded cables 492 ft [150 m] For motor cables exceeding these lengths, the dV/dt filter plus VPL (option L10) needs to be selected. Note: Operation with output frequencies < 10 Hz is permissible for max. 5 minutes. Also refer to the appropriate notes in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. Note: Option L07 cannot be combined with the following options: • L08 (motor reactor) • L10 (dV/dt filter plus VPL). SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Description of Options Description of options L08 Motor reactor Motor reactors reduce the voltage load on the motor windings by reducing the voltage gradients on the motor terminals generated by the drive. At the same time, the capacitive charge/discharge currents that place an additional load at the Motors Module output when long motor cables are used are reduced. Suitably dimensioned motor reactors or connecting several motor reactors in series offers the possibility of dealing with larger cable capacitances, therefore allowing longer motor cable length to be connected. In the case of multi motor drives, the use of motor reactors is recommended as a general principle. The motor reactor is accommodated in the Cabinet Module. A supplementary cabinet 23.6 inch [600 mm] wide located to the right of the Motor Module is only required for the chassis format in frame sizes HX and JX. For Motor Modules in the chassis format, the maximum motor cable length with or without motor reactors is 980 ft [300 m] (shielded) or 1,480 ft [450 m] (unshielded). Please consult factory if longer motor cable lengths are required. For Motor Modules in the Booksize Cabinet Kit format with motor reactors (option L08), the maximum motor cable lengths as specified in the table below can be reached: L09 Two motor reactors in series For Single Motor Modules in the Booksize Cabinet Kit format, selecting option L09 provides two motor reactors in series, which are accommodated within the standard width of the Cabinet Kit. The maximum permissible motor cable lengths with option L09 are specified in the table below. Note: The terminal lugs of the reactors are not nickel-plated. Note: The terminal lugs of the reactors are not nickel-plated. Booksize Cabinet Kit Rated output current of motor module 5 Maximum motor cable length for Booksize Cabinet Kit Motor Modules with output reactors Shielded cable Without reactor Unshielded cable With one reactor (option L08) With two reactors in series (option L09) Without reactor With one reactor (option L08) With two reactors in series (option L09) Order No. [A] ft [m] ft [m] ft [m] ft [m] ft [m] ft [m] 6SL3720-1TE21-0AB3 9 164 [50] 443 [135] — 246 [75] 6\56 [200] — 6SL3720-1TE21-8AB3 18 230 [70] 525 [160] 1,050 [320] 246 [75] 787 [240] 1,575 [480] 6SL3720-1TE23-0AB3 30 328 [100] 623 [190] 1,230 [375] 492 [150] 919 [280] 1,837 [560] 6SL3720-1TE24-5AB3 45 328 [100] 656 [200] 1,312 [400] 492 [150] 984 [300] 1,968 [600] 6SL3720-1TE26-0AB3 60 328 [100] 656 [200] 1,312 [400] 492 [150] 984 [300] 1,968 [600] 6SL3720-1TE28-5AB3 85 328 [100] 656 [200] 1,312 [400] 492 [150] 984 [300] 1,968 [600] 6SL3720-1TE31-3AB3 132 328 [100] 656 [200] 1,312 [400] 492 [150] 984 [300] 1,968 [600] Siemens D21.7 – 2013 5/13 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Description of Options Description of options L10 dV/dt filter with VPL (Voltage Peak Limiter) L13 Input contactor The dV/dt filter plus VPL (Voltage Peak Limiter) limits the voltage rate-of-rise dV/dt to values < 500 V/ s, and the typical voltage peaks to the following values according to the limit value curve to IEC/TS 60034-17: 2006: • < 1000 V at ULine < 575 V • < 1250 V at 660 V < ULine < 690 V Line Connection Modules up to 800A rated input current include a manually operated molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) disconnect. The input contactor allows the drive to be connected to or be disconnected from the input power supply in response to an electrical control signal. This function is also required to disconnect the line-up from the supply in the event of an Emergency OFF (in this case it is controlled by the drive regulator). The dv/dt filter plus VPL functionally comprises two components, the dv/dt reactor and the voltage limiting network VPL, which cuts off voltage peaks and feeds back the energy into the DC bus. Option L10 is installed in an additional cabinet with a width of 23.6 inch [600 mm] that is located on the right-hand side of the Motor Module. A dv/dt filter plus VPL generally allows the use of standard non-inverter duty motors with standard insulation and without insulated bearings for VFD operation. 5 For motors insulated per NEMA MG1, part 30 (voltage peaks <1,000 V and dV/dt <500 V/ s) the maximum allowable motor cable length is as follows. With longer cable lengths voltage peaks may exceed 1,000 V. Maximum motor cable length for motors insulated per NEMA MG1, part 30 Rated voltage Unshielded cable Shielded cable 380 – 480 V 980’ (300 m) 980’ (300 m) 500 – 600 V 490’ (150 m) 490’ (150 m) The dV/dt filter plus VPL is designed for the following maximum motor cable lengths: • Shielded cables: 980 ft [300 m] • Unshielded cables 1,480 ft [450 m] When using dv/dt filters, restrictions regarding permissible pulse and output frequencies must be observed. Please refer to the appropriate notes in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. Note: Parts of option L10 do not have nickel-plated copper busbars. Option L10 cannot be combined with the following options: • L07 (dv/dt filter compact plus VPL) • L08 (motor reactor). An input contactor option L13 is available for Line Connection Modules with Basic Line Modules (option L43); for Smart Line Modules and Active Line Modules, the contactor is already included for the purpose of pre-charging. L21 Line side surge arrestors for ungrounded supply systems Three single phase surge arrestors are connected ahead of the incoming circuit breaker disconnect. L22 Without input line reactor Basic Line Modules or Smart Line Modules are supplied as standard with line reactors; the reason for this is that a line reactor primarily assures the minimum current form factor, protects the drive against excessive harmonic currents and thus overloads, and improves the sensitivity of the VFD to voltage spikes. An input line reactor is recommended for most installations. If the drive is powered via a separate drive isolation transformer, or if the ratio between the line short circuit capacity at the point of connection and the rated drive output is low (high network impedance), the input line reactor may be omitted by selecting option L22. Option L22 is available for Line Connection Modules (rated current < 2000 A) in conjunction with Basic Line Modules (option L43), as well as for Smart Line Modules. This option is not available for Basic or Smart Line Modules connected in parallel to a single Line Connection Module as line reactors are required to ensure current sharing. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. L25 Drawout circuit breaker Line Connection Modules with an input current of > 800 A are equipped with a fixed mounted insulated case circuit breakers as standard. If the customer requires a visible isolating distance, a drawout circuit breaker can be ordered as an option. 5/14 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Description of Options Description of options L34 Output circuit breaker Comment: These current transformers are already included in options P10 and P11 (power meter). A circuit breaker is provided at the output of Motor Modules chassis format, to disconnect the motor from the drive. L42 Line Connection Module for Active Line Module A permanent-magnet synchronous motor generates a voltage at its motor terminals proportional to the speed, and in the event of an overspeed a very high voltage can be applied to the output of the motor module which can damage to the inverter as well as the DC bus and other components connected to it. Option L42 adds the relevant components (precharge connection, busbars etc.) in the Line Connection Module for connection to an Active Line Module. Also refer to the descriptions in section 3. The output circuit breaker option L34 is available to disconnect the motor in the event of a fault or if maintenance work is to be carried out. Option L34 is completely prewired and is accommodated in an additional cabinet, which is arranged to the right hand side of the Motor Module (16 “ [400 mm] wide for frame sizes FX/GX, 23.6” [600 mm] wide for frame size HX/JX). Option L43 adds the relevant components (line reactor, precharge connection, busbars etc.) in the Line Connection Module for connection to a Basic Line Module. Also refer to the descriptions in section 3. The circuit breaker is automatically controlled by the Motor Module. A TM31 Terminal Module is included with this option to provide the associated inputs and outputs. Option L34 cannot be combined with option L10 (dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter). L37 DC disconnect including precharge circuit If, for reasons relating to the process or availability, the Motor Module needs to be disconnected from or connected to the live DC bus during operation, a manually operated disconnect switch can be ordered as Option L37. For Motor Modules in the chassis format, this takes the form of a mechanically operated disconnect switch, and for Booksize Cabinet Kits an electrically operated contactor combination. Option L37 is installed on the busbar between the Motor Module and the main DC bus. To ensure that the motor module can be connected to a live DC bus, the option also includes a precharge circuit for the DC capacitors of the relevant Motor Module. The switching operation is performed externally. The operating levers are padlockable (padlock not included in scope of delivery). Option L37 also includes option M60 (additional touch protection) for channeling the cooling air. Options L61/L62 and L64/L65 (braking units) cannot be ordered together with option L37 for space reasons. Note: Option L37 is not yet UL listed and cannot be included in a UL listed line-up. L41 Current transformer upstream of main circuit breaker If additional current transformers are required for measuring or monitoring purposes, these can be ordered as option L41 for the Line Connection Modules. The current transformers are installed upstream of the main circuit breaker in all three infeed phases. The transformers have an accuracy class of 1.0. The secondary current is 5 A, maximum in a NEMA version Line Connection Module (order number ending in U3). The transformer measuring connections are routed to the terminal block in the Line Connection Module. L43 Line Connection Module for Basic Line Module L44 Line Connection Module for Smart Line Module Option L44 adds the relevant components (precharge connection, busbars etc.) in the Line Connection Module for connection to a Smart Line Module. Also refer to the descriptions in section 3. L45 EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton, installed in the cabinet door The twist-to-release, padlockable EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton is door mounted in the Line Connection Module, with its contacts wired to a terminal block. This option is provided for integration into the customer’s external EMERGENCY OFF circuit. NOTE: This option is for a pushbutton only, it is not wired into the drive circuit. L55 Enclosure space heater Space heaters are recommended at low ambient temperatures and high levels of humidity to prevent condensation. One 100 W heater is provided for each Cabinet Module <32” (800 mm) wide. For cabinets exceeding this width, two heaters will be installed. This option requires an external power source (110 to 230 V 1 phase AC, fused for max. 16 A). Option L55 cannot be combined with option K82 (Terminal interface for controlling safety functions). L61, L62, L64, L65 Braking units Braking units may be required for drives in which motors might operate in generator mode and the excess energy cannot be absorbed by other loads or regenerated back into the supply system, or braking is required if the supply system fails. The braking unit comprises two components: • A Braking Module that can be installed in the air discharge of chassis format power units • A braking resistor to be mounted externally (IP20 degree of protection). The braking unit functions as an autonomous unit, and does not require an external power supply. During the braking process, the kinetic energy is converted into heat in the externally mounted braking resistor. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 5/15 5 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Description of Options Description of options A cable length of max. 328 ft. (100 m) is permissible between the Braking Module and the braking resistor. This allows the braking resistor to be mounted externally so that heat losses can be dissipated outside the drive enclosure. The braking resistor is directly connected to the Braking Module. For SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules the following braking modules are available, depending on the frame size: Option 5 For frame size Rated power PDB kW 125 250 Since the response philosophy to a ground fault may differ, output relay contacts are not wired in the drive but are available for wiring to drive terminals or integration into a plant control system. Additional terminals on the device are provided for an output to an external display, and inputs for external reset and test buttons. 125 250 Note: Braking Module options cannot be combined with the DC disconnect (option L37). For additional information, please refer to the description of Braking Modules in Section 4. P/P20 G_D011_EN_00328 1.50 P20 0.75 P40 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 Enclosure with option M06 M07 Base (plinth) 8” (200mm) high PDB 0.25 0 M06 Base (plinth) 4” (100mm) high The 4” enclosure base allows larger bending radii for cables (cable entry from below) and routing them within the base. It is delivered already mounted to the enclosure. The height of the operator panel changes accordingly. The base is always colored RAL 7022 (umbra grey). A special color is not possible. P15 0.50 An insulation monitor must be used if the drive is operated on an ungrounded power supply. This device monitors the complete electrically connected circuit for insulation (ground) faults. Two threshold values of resistance to ground (between 1 k and 10 M can be set (for alarm and fault). Note: Only one insulation monitor can be used in an electrically connected network. PDB: Rated power (continuous braking power) P20: 20 s power referred to a braking interval of 90 s P15: 15 s power referred to a braking interval of 90 s 1.00 Line Connection Modules have a short circuit current rating (SCCR) per UL508A supplement SB as shown in section 3. For Line Connection Modules rated 1,000 A and up, a high SCCR (84 or 100 kA) is optionally available by specifying option code L70. L87 Insulation Monitor for ungrounded supplies Braking Module Rated Rated power PDB power PDB kW kW 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC (& 660… 690 V 3ph. AC) FX 25 100 L61 L62 GX, HX, JX 50 200 500 … 600 V 3ph. AC FX 25 100 L64 L65 GX, HX, JX 50 200 1.25 L70 High SCCR rating 70 80 90 100 s t PDB = Rated power P15 = 5 x PDB = Power which is permissible every 90 s for 15 s P20 = 4 x PDB = Power which is permissible every 90 s for 20 s P40 = 2 x PDB = Power which is permissible every 90 s for 40 s Load diagram for Braking Modules and braking resistors Additional notes about possible duty cycles of the braking resistors and other engineering notes are included in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. The 8” enclosure base provides more space for bending and routing cables. The base is delivered already mounted to the enclosure. The height of the operator panel changes accordingly. The base color is the same as the enclosure, RAL 7035 (light grey). If the enclosure is ordered in a special color (option Y09), the 8” base is also painted the same color. M21 Enclosure NEMA 1 (IP 21) In the base IP20 enclosure air is exhausted upwards though the top of the cabinet, which is covered by a metal grate. With option M21 a raised roof is added to the cabinet, to provide protection against falling dirt. The enclosure height increases by approx. 10” (250 mm). For transport reasons the raised roof and standoffs are shipped as loose items and must be mounted on site. 5/16 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Description of Options Description of options M23 Enclosure NEMA 1 filtered (IP23) M59 Closed cabinet doors, air inlet from below through floor A tophat is added to the enclosure increasing its height by approx. 16” (400 mm). Louvers and foam air filters are added to air inlet and outlet openings. Option M23 also includes option M60 (additional covers for touch safety). If the Cabinet Modules are installed on a false floor or duct which forms part of a forced ventilation system, the modules can be ordered with closed doors (without ventilation openings). To ensure an adequate air inlet cross-section, the units are shipped without the standard base plates. In this case, the customer must ensure that dirt, dust or moisture cannot enter the Cabinet Module. Cables must be routed in such a way that they do not impede the flow of air through the cabinet floor opening. A NEMA 1 filtered (IP23) enclosure is the minimum required for listing the enclosed drive per UL508A. For transport reasons the tophat is shipped as a loose item and must be mounted on site. Note the tophat will be supplied in the same color as the specified for the enclosure. However, the molded plastic louvers are colored RAL7035 and cannot be painted. M26 Side panel mounted on right Cabinet Modules (respectively transport sections) are open at both sides, for side-by-side installation with other cabinet modules. With option M26, the cabinet is fitted with a side panel (skin) on the right (when viewed from the front). Note: Side panels on both sides of the line-up are necessary to obtain the enclosure type/degree of protection specified. M27 Side panel mounted on left Cabinet Modules (respectively transport sections) are open at both sides, for side-by-side installation with other cabinet modules. With option M27, the cabinet is fitted with a side panel (skin) on the left (when viewed from the front). Note: Side panels on both sides of the line-up are necessary to obtain the enclosure type/degree of protection specified. M43 Enclosure IP43 Similar to NEMA 1 filtered (M23) with tophat and foam air filters on air inlets and outlets, but additionally a 1mm wire mesh is provided behind the air filters. The tophat increases the base enclosure height by approx. 16” (400 mm). Note the tophat will be supplied in the same color as the specified for the enclosure. However, the molded plastic louvers are colored RAL7035 and cannot be painted. M54 Enclosure NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) Similar to NEMA 1 filtered (M23) with tophat and louvers but with fine paper air filters added to air inlet and outlet openings, to prevent even fine dust particles from entering the enclosure in very dusty environments. These fine dust filters are a patented design for high volume airflow with small derating. Please refer to Engineering Information section 6 for current derating with a NEMA 12 filtered enclosure. Suitable touch protection must be provided if the area beneath the Cabinet Modules can be accessed. M60 Additional touch protection With option M60, additional covers are installed for improved touch protection of live parts, such as in the area of the AC and DC busbars and in front of the power unit. Option M60 is already included with Options M23, M43 and M54. M70 EMC shield bus The EMC shield bus is used for the connection of the shields of cables on the line and motor sides. The supplied EMC shield clamps provide a large surface area for the connection, to ensure effective grounding also of high frequency noise. M80 to M87 DC busbar system The busbars for the common DC bus are located in the upper section of the Cabinet Modules, and connect the Line Modules to the Motor Modules. They are nickel plated as standard and are available in different sizes for a range of current carrying capacities. The common DC bus is dimensioned according to the load requirements and demand factor associated with operation of the individual drives, and according to the specific Cabinet Module layout. For this reason the DC bus is not supplied as standard, but must be specified as an option for each Cabinet Module. Please also refer to section 2 – System configuration guidelines. When selecting the DC bus, it is important to ensure that the bus sizes in adjacent Cabinet Modules are compatible with each other (refer to the table below and option selection matrix for the Cabinet Modules in question). If Cabinet Modules are ordered in factory assembled transport sections with option Y11, all Cabinet Modules in a transport section must have identical busbars. Note that it is mandatory for all Line Modules, Motor Modules (Chassis format) and Booksize Base Cabinets to include a DC bus option. The tophat increases the base enclosure height by approx. 16” (400 mm). Note the tophat will be supplied in the same color as the specified for the enclosure. However, the molded plastic louvers are colored RAL7035 and cannot be painted. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 5/17 5 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Description of Options Description of options Option M80 M81 M82 M83 M84 M85 M86 M87 5 Rated current of DC bus IN A 1,170 1,500 1,840 2,150 2,730 3,320 3,720 4,480 Qty. of parallel busbars per pole 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 Busbar size [width] mm 60 80 100 60 80 100 80 100 Compatible with option(s) M83 M84 and M86 M85 and M87 M80 M81 and M86 M82 and M87 M81 and M84 M82 and M85 P11 Power Meter with PROFIBUS port A power meter (Sentron PAC3200 or equivalent) is mounted in the door of the Line Connection Module. The meter displays measured and calculated values including voltages, currents, power factor, THD, active, reactive and apparent power etc. Current transformers (option L41) are included in option P10. The meter includes a PROFIBUS communications port for transmitting data to a control system. T58 Nameplate English/French The scope of delivery also includes the jumpers required to link the DC bus of a Cabinet Module to the adjacent one. The standard nameplate text is in both English and Spanish. This option provides for a nameplate with both English and French text. M90 Lifting beam/eye bolts U90 UL listing per UL508A For single cabinets up to a width of 24” (600 mm), eye bolts are provided. For larger enclosures transportation beams are provided. This option needs to be selected for every Cabinet Module in a drive line-up that is to be provided with a UL listing mark per UL508A (when built in the US, UL file number E83449). Once the drives are in position, the lifting hardware needs to be removed to mount the raised roof or tophats. When Cabinet Modules are ordered in factory assembled transport sections (option Y11),the transportation beams are automatically included and option M90 does not need to be specified additionally. UL listing mark Note that Integration Engineering (see page 5/8) must be ordered for a UL listed line-up. Please refer to section 2 – UL listing of a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module line-up for additional information. U91 cUL listing for Canada per UL508A Similar to option U90, this option needs to be selected for every Cabinet Module in a drive line-up that is to be provided with a cUL listing mark for Canada per UL508A (when built in the US, UL file number E83449). Note that Integration Engineering (see page 5/8) must be ordered for a UL listed line-up. SINAMICS drive on pallet with transportation beams P10 Power Meter A power meter (Socomec Diris A40 or equivalent) is mounted in the door of the Line Connection Module. The meter displays measured and calculated values including voltages, currents, power factor, THD, active, reactive and apparent power etc. Current transformers (option L41) are included in option P10. 5/18 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 Please refer to section 2 – UL listing of a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module line-up for additional information. Y09 Special enclosure paint color (specify color) The standard color of the drive enclosures is RAL 7035 (light grey). A special color must be specified in plain text when ordering. In general, colors available as powder coating can be ordered. Please consult factory to confirm. The enclosure, tophats and, if specified, 8” high plinths (option M07) will be supplied in the specified special color. SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Description of Options Description of options Note: 1.The molded plastic parts (e.g. louvers) are colored RAL 7035 and cannot be painted. 2.4” high plinths are always colored RAL 7022 (umber grey). 3.Cabinet frames and interiors are always colored RAL 7035. +D4Z01R04 Y11 Factory assembly into transport sections (specify sections) With this option, Cabinet Modules are factory assembled into transport sections with a maximum total width of up to approx. 8 ft. (2,400 mm). The modules in a section are interconnected, both mechanically and electrically (electrical interconnections include the auxiliary power supply system, and power connections between Line Connection Modules and Line Modules. Control connections are not included – please refer to the section on Integration Engineering). The DC bus (options M80 to M87) in a transport section is provided as a solid bus for the complete section, to reduce the number a connection points. For this reason the identical bus size must be specified for Cabinet Modules in one section. Which Cabinet Modules are to be included in a specific transport section, and their sequence from left to right must be specified in plain text according to the syntax below: Plain text specification: TE 1 — Field 1 80 Y32 Two line label for system identification, 40 x 180 mm Lamicoid labels (white with black lettering) for identifying Cabinet Modules are available. The labels are attached to the cabinet door. Dimensions H × W: 40 × 180 mm (approx. 1.6“ x 7.1“) The text must be specified in plain text when ordering. 5 Field 1: Max. 9 characters, font size 10 mm (approx. 0.4”). Field 2: Max. 9 characters, font size 10 mm (approx. 0.4”). Field 3: Max. 20 characters, font size 10 mm (approx. 0.4”). 1...5 Transport section Sequence no. of transport section Position of Cabinet Module within transport section Examples: TE1-1 for the 1st cabinet in transport section 1 TE1-2 for the 2nd cabinet in transport section 1 TE2-1 for the 1st cabinet in transport section 2 Option Y11 is particularly recommended for units comprising Line Connection Modules and Line Modules because the required power connections, and connections for precharge circuits, for example, are made in the factory. A transport section is always shipped with a transportation beam (option M90 is not required). Y31 One line label for system identification, 40 x 80 mm Lamicoid labels (white with black lettering) for identifying Cabinet Modules are available. The labels are attached to the cabinet door. Dimensions H × W: 40 × 80 mm (approx. 1.6“ x 3.2“) 40 90 +D4Z01R04 -31FA011 infeed roller FS Field 1 Field 2 40 Field 3 180 Y33 Four line label for system identification, 40 x 180 mm Lamicoid labels (white with black lettering) for identifying Cabinet Modules are available. The labels are attached to the cabinet door. Dimensions H × W: 40 × 180 mm (approx. 1.6“ x 7.1“) The text must be specified in plain text when ordering. Field 1: Max. 9 characters, font size 10 mm (approx. 0.4”). Field 2: Max. 20 characters, font size 6 mm (approx. 0.25”). Field 3: Max. 20 characters, font size 6 mm (approx. 0.25”). Field 4: Max. 20 characters, font size 6 mm (approx. 0.25”). Field 5: Max. 20 characters, font size 6 mm (approx. 0.25”). The text must be specified in plain text when ordering. Field 1: Max. 9 characters, font size 10 mm (approx. 0.4”). 80 +D4Z01R04 Field 1 -31 FA011 Short text 1 Field 2 -31FA012 Short text 2 Field 3 -31FA013 Short text 3 Field 4 -31FA014 Short text 4 Field 5 40 180 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 5/19 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Notes 5 5/20 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules 5 Engineering Information 6 6/2 Technical data Electrical and mechanical specifications Ambient conditions Mechanical stability Compliance with standards 6/5 Characteristic curves Derating due to altitude and temperature Derating as a function of pulse frequency Overload capability 6/8 Control units and interfaces CU320-2 DP Control Unit CU320-2 PN Control Unit SINAMICS S120 firmware CBE20 Communications board Ethernet BOP20 Basic Operator Panel AOP30 Basic Operator Panel Customer Terminal Block – X55 6/19 Sensor and I/O modules SMC10 Sensor Module SMC20 Sensor Module SMC30 Sensor Module TM150 Terminal (RTD) Module VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module 6/24 Connection system – Signal cables DRIVE-CLIQ cables 6/28 Safety Integrated Safety Integrated Functions TM54F Terminal Module, Fail Safe SBA Safe Brake Adapter Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Technical data Technical data General technical specifications Electrical specifications Line voltages 6 Line supply types Line frequency Output frequency 2) • Control type Servo • Control type Vector • Control type V/Hz Line power factor Fundamental • Basic Line Module • Smart Line Module • Active Line Module Efficiency • Basic Line Module • Smart Line Module • Active Line Module • Motor Module Overvoltage category Control method Fixed speeds Skipped speed ranges Setpoint resolution Braking operation Mechanical specifications Enclosure type Protection class Touch protection Cabinet system Paint finish Type of cooling 1) For 380 … 480 V 3 AC, ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min) 500 … 600 (690) V 1) 3 AC, ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min) Grounded TN/TT systems and non-grounded IT systems 47 … 63 Hz 0 … 650 Hz 0 … 600 Hz 0 … 600 Hz > 0.96 > 0.96 Adjustable (factory setting = unity power factor) > 99.0 % > 98.5 % > 97.5 % (including Active Interface Module) > 98.5 % III to IEC 61800-5-1 Vector/servo control with and without encoder or V/Hz control 15 fixed speeds plus 1 minimum speed, parameterizable (in the default setting, 3 fixed setpoints plus 1 minimum speed are selectable using terminal block/PROFIBUS/PROFINET) 4, parameterizable 0.001 rpm digital (14 bits + sign) 12 bit analog With Active Line Modules and Smart Line Modules, four-quadrant operation as standard (energy recovery). With Basic Line Modules, single-quadrant operation as standard. Braking using an optional braking module. Base IP20, optionally NEMA 1 up to NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) I acc. to IEC 61800-5-1 IEC 50274/BGV A3 for the intended purpose, and per UL508A Rittal TS 8, doors with double-barb lock, three-section base plates for cable entry RAL 7035 (indoor requirements) Forced air cooling AF to IEC 60146 UL listing the maximum supply voltage is 600 V AC. However, Cabinet Modules are rated for 690 V AC per IEC standards. Please note: - The correlation between the maximum output frequency, pulse frequency and current derating. Higher output frequencies for specific configurations are available on request. - The correlation between the minimum output frequency and permissible output current (current derating). 2) 6/2 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Technical data Technical data Ambient conditions Ambient temperature Storage 1) -13 ... 131 °F (-25 ... +55 °C) Relative humidity (condensation not permissible) Environmental class/harmful chemical substances Organic/biological influences 5 ... 95% 2) acc. to IEC 60721-3-1 Class 1C2 acc. to IEC 60721-3-1 Class 1B1 acc. to IEC 60721-3-1 Class 2 acc. to IEC 61800-5-1 Cabinet Modules, chassis format: up to 2000 m above sea level, without derating, > 2000 m, see characteristic curves/derating data For Motor Modules Booksize Cabinet Kit format: up to 1000 m above sea level without derating, > 1000 m, see characteristic curves/derating data Operation Transport 1) Storage 1) Class 1M2 Class 2M2 — acc. to IEC 60721-3-1 acc. to IEC 60721-3-2 1.5 mm at 5 ... 9 Hz 3.1 mm at 5 ... 9 Hz 0.075 mm at 10 ... 58 Hz 5 m/s² at > 9 ... 200 Hz 10 m/s² at > 9 ... 200 Hz 9.8 m/s² at > 58 ... 200 Hz Class 1M2 Class 2M2 Class 3M4 acc. to IEC 60721-3-1 acc. to IEC 60721-3-2 acc. to IEC 60721-3-3 40 m/s² at 22 ms 100 m/s² at 11 ms 100 m/s² at 11 ms Degree of pollution Installation altitude Mechanical stability Vibration load • Deflection • Acceleration Shock load • Acceleration Compliance with standards Conformances/approvals, according to Radio interference suppression 1) 2) Transport 1) -13 ... 158 °F (-25 ... +70 °C) down to -40 °F (-40 °C) 2) for 24 hours 5 ... 95% at 40 °C Class 2K3 acc. to IEC 60721-3-2 Class 2C2 acc. to IEC 60721-3-2 Class 2B1 acc. to IEC 60721-3-2 Class 2 acc. to IEC 61800-5-1 Operation 32 ... +104 °F (0 ... +40 °C) to +122 °F (+50 °C) see derating data 5 ... 95% 2) Class 3K3 acc. to IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3C2 acc. to IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3B1 acc. to IEC 60721-3-3 Class 2 acc. to IEC 61800-5-1 6 CE (EMC Directive No. 2004/108/EC and Low-Voltage Directive No. 2006/95/EC). Optional UL listing to UL508A. SINAMICS drive systems are not designed for connection to the public network (first environment). Radio interference suppression is compliant with the EMC product standard for variable speed drives IEC 61800-3, “Second environment” (industrial line supplies). The equipment can cause electromagnetic interference when it is connected to the public network. In transport packaging. Deviations with respect to the specified class are underlined. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/3 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Technical data Technical data The most important directives and standards are listed below. These are used as basis for the SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules drive system and they must be carefully observed to achieve an EMC-compliant configuration that is safe both functionally and in operation. European directives 2006/95/EC Low-voltage directive: Legal guidelines of the EU member states concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits 2004/108/EC EMC directive: Legal guidelines of the EU member states for electromagnetic compatibility European standards 6 ISO 13849-1 Safety of machinery – safety-related parts of control systems; Part 1: General design guidelines (ISO 13849-1: 2006) (replaces EN 954-1) IEC 60146-1-1 Semiconductor converters – General requirements and line-commutated converters Part 1-1: Specification of basic requirements IEC 60204-1 Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines; Part 1: General requirements IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code) IEC 61508-1 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related systems Part 1: General requirements IEC 61800-2 Variable-speed electric drives Part 2: General requirements – Rating specifications for low-voltage adjustable frequency AC power drive systems IEC 61800-3 Variable-speed electric drives Part 3: EMC requirements including specific test methods IEC 61800-5-1 Adjustable-speed electrical power drive systems Part 5: Safety requirements Main section 1: Electrical and thermal requirements IEC 61800-5-2 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5-2: Safety requirements – Functional safety (IEC 61800-5-2:) 2007 North American standards NEMA ICS 7 Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable-Speed Drives NEMA ICS 7.1 Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation, and Operation of Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000V max) UL508A (optional) Enclosed industrial control panels (options U90/U91) UL508C Power Conversion Equipment 6/4 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Characteristic curves Characteristic curves Derating data for motor modules, booksize format SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules with booksize motor modules and the associated system components are rated for an ambient temperature of 104 °F (40 °C) and installation altitudes up to 3,300 ft (1,000 m) above sea level. If SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules with booksize motor modules are operated at ambient temperatures higher than 104 °F (40 °C) and/or installation altitudes higher than 3,300 ft (1,000 m) above sea level, then the corresponding derating factors must be taken into account as a function of the ambient temperature and/or the installation altitude. These derating factors are different to the derating factors for the chassis format power units and are listed in Catalog PM 21. Derating data for the chassis format SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules and the associated system components are rated for an ambient temperature of 104 °F (40 °C) and installation altitudes up to 6,600 ft (2,000 m) above sea level. For ambient temperatures > 104 °F (40 °C) the output current must be reduced. Ambient temperatures above 122 °F (50 °C) are not permissible. At installation altitudes > 6,600 ft ( >2,000 m) above sea level, it must be taken into consideration that with increasing altitude, the air pressure decreases and therefore the air density. As a consequence, the cooling efficiency and the insulation capacity of the air also decrease. Due to the reduced cooling efficiency, it is necessary, on one hand, to reduce the ambient temperature and on the other hand, to lower heat loss in the Cabinet Module by reducing the output current, whereby ambient temperatures lower than 104 °F (40 °C) may be offset to compensate. The following table specifies the permissible output current as a function of the installation altitude and ambient temperature for the various enclosure types. The values apply under the precondition that it is guaranteed that the cooling air flow is as specified in the technical data. Installation Current derating factor (as a % of the rated current) for an ambient/air intake temperature of altitude above sea level m 68 °F (20 °C) 77 °F (25 °C) 86 °F (30 °C) 95 °F (35 °C) 104 °F (40 °C) 113 °F (45 °C) For NEMA 1 and NEMA 1 filtered (IP20 to IP43) enclosures 0 to 6,600 ft 93.3% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% (0 to 2,000 m) up to 8,200 ft 96.3% 100% 100% 100% 100% (up to 2,500 m) up to 9,800 ft 98.7% 100% 100% 100% (up to 3,000 m) up to 11,500 ft 100% 100% 100% (up to 3,500 m) up to 13,100 ft 96.3% 100% 100% (up to 4,000 m) up to 14,800 ft 97.5% 100% (up to 4,500 m) up to 16,400 ft 98.2% (up to 5,000 m) For NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosures 0 to 6,600 ft 93.3% 86.7% 100% 100% 100% 100% (0 to 2,000 m) up to 8,200 ft 96.3% 89.8% 100% 100% 100% (up to 2,500 m) up to 9,800 ft 98.7% 92.5% 100% 100% (up to 3,000 m) up to 11,500 ft 94.7% 100% 100% (up to 3,500 m) up to 13,100 ft 96.3% 90.7% 100% (up to 4,000 m) up to 14,800 ft 97.5% 92.1% (up to 4,500 m) up to 16,400 ft 93.0% (up to 5,000 m) 122 °F (50 °C) 86.7% 80.0% Current-derating factors for Cabinet Modules as a function of the ambient/air intake temperature, the installation altitude and the enclosure type Voltage derating: For installation altitudes from 6,600 ft (2,000 m) up to 16,400 ft (5,000 m), voltage derating is additionally required. Alternatively, voltage derating may be avoided by inserting an isolating transformer upstream and in close proximity to the drive, to reduce transient overvoltages to levels permitted by EN 60664-1. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/5 6 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Characteristic curves Characteristic curves Current derating for SINAMICS S120 Motors Modules, chassis format as a function of the pulse frequency For control performance reasons or to increase output frequency, the pulse frequency can be increased relative to the factory setting. When the pulse frequency is increased, the output current needs to be derated. This derating factor must be applied to the currents specified in the technical data. An increased pulse frequency may also be used to reduce motor noise. Note that SINAMICS S120 firmware also includes functionality that allows an increased pulse frequency without derating, when conditions permit (load, ambient temperature, and input voltage). The pulse frequency is automatically reduced if the drive approaches its thermal limits. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. Motor Module chassis format Rated Rated Rated Derating factor power at power at output at pulse frequency 460 (400) V 460 V current IN Order No. kW HP A 2.5 kHz 4 kHz 5 kHz 7.5 kHz Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC 6SL3720-1TE32-1AA3 150 125 (110) 210 95% 82% 74% 54% 6SL3720-1TE32-6AA3 200 160 (132) 260 95% 83% 74% 54% 6SL3720-1TE33-1AA3 200 (160) 250 310 97% 88% 78% 54% 6SL3720-1TE33-8AA3 300 380 96% 87% 77% 54% 250 (200) 6SL3720-1TE35-0AA3 400 300 (250) 490 94% 78% 71% 53% Derating factor of the output current as a function of the pulse frequency for units with a rated pulse frequency of 2 kHz Motor Module chassis format 6 Rated power at 460 (400) V or 575 (690) V Order No. kW Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC 6SL3720-1TE36-1AA3 355 (315) 6SL3720-1TE37-5AA3 450 (400) 6SL3720-1TE38-4AA3 500 (450) 6SL3720-1TE41-0AA3 650 (560) 6SL3720-1TE41-2AA3 800 (710) 6SL3720-1TE41-4AA3 900 (800) Line voltage 500 … 600 V 3ph. AC 6SL3720-1TG28-5AA3 60 (75) 6SL3720-1TG31-0AA3 75 (90) 6SL3720-1TG31-2AA3 90 (110) 6SL3720-1TG31-5AA3 110 (132) 6SL3720-1TG31-8AA3 132 (160) 6SL3720-1TG32-2AA3 160 (200) 6SL3720-1TG32-6AA3 200 (250) 6SL3720-1TG33-3AA3 250 (315) 6SL3720-1TG34-1AA3 300 (400) 6SL3720-1TG34-7AA3 350 (450) 6SL3720-1TG35-8AA3 450 (560) 6SL3720-1TG37-4AA3 560 (710) 6SL3720-1TG38-1AA3 630 (800) 6SL3720-1TG38-8AA3 750 (900) 6SL3720-1TG41-0AA3 800 (1,000) 6SL3720-1TG41-3AA3 1,000 (1,200) 8 kHz 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% Rated power at 460 V or 575V HP Rated output current IN Derating factor at pulse frequency A 2 kHz 2.5 kHz 4 kHz 5 kHz 7.5 kHz 500 600 700 800 1,000 1,150 605 745 840 985 1,260 1,405 83% 83% 87% 92% 92% 97% 72% 72% 79% 87% 87% 95% 64% 64% 64% 70% 70% 74% 60% 60% 55% 60% 60% 64% 40% 40% 40% 50% 50% 50% 75 100 125 150 150 200 250 300 400 450 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,250 85 100 120 150 175 215 260 330 410 465 575 735 810 910 1,025 1,270 93% 92% 92% 90% 92% 92% 92% 89% 89% 92% 91% 87% 97% 92% 91% 87% 89% 88% 88% 84% 87% 87% 88% 82% 82% 87% 85% 79% 95% 87% 86% 79% 71% 71% 71% 66% 70% 70% 71% 65% 65% 67% 64% 64% 71% 67% 64% 55% 60% 60% 60% 55% 60% 60% 60% 55% 55% 55% 50% 55% 55% 55% 50% 40% 40% 40% 40% 35% 40% 40% 40% 40% 35% 35% 35% 35% 35% 33% 30% 25% Derating factor of the output current as a function of the pulse frequency for units with a rated pulse frequency of 1.25 kHz The following table lists the approx. maximum output frequency as a function of pulse frequency, at default 250 s current controller clock cycle. Higher output frequencies are possible at higher pulse frequencies and current controller clock cycles as low as 125 s: Pulse frequency 1.25 kHz 2.00 kHz 2.50 kHz ≥ 4.00 kHz 6/6 Max. output frequency 100 Hz 160 Hz 200 Hz 300 Hz Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Characteristic curves Characteristic curves Overload capability SINAMICS S120 drives may be operated with both variable torque and constant torque loads at either low or high overload duties. The criterion for overload is that the drive is operated at its base load current before and after the overload occurs, based on a duty cycle duration of 300 s. For short, repeating load cycles with significant load fluctuations within the load cycle, please refer to the appropriate sections in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual. Motor Modules booksize format Motor Modules with power units in the booksize format have the following overload capabilities: Drive overload current Short-time current 1.76 IH Rated current (continuous) 1 .5 IH Motor Modules chassis format IH Motor Modules with power units in the chassis format can be configured on the basis of different base load currents. 30 s 60 s G_D213_EN_00049 Base load current IL for high overload 300 s The base load current for a low overload IL is the basis for a duty cycle of 110 % for 60 s or 150 % for 10 s. Drive output current 10 s High overload 1.5 x IL Line Modules chassis format The base load current for a high overload I H DC is the basis for a duty cycle of 150 % for 60s or I max DC for 5 s. Short-time current 150 % Short-time current 110 % Rated current (continuous) Converter current 5s Base load current IL for low overload 60 s 300 s Short-time current 150 % 1.5 x IH DC Rated current (continuous) Base load current IH DC for high overload t Low overload 6 Short-time current Imax Imax DC G_D213_EN_00035 1.1 x IL Irated DC The base load current for a high overload IH is the basis for a duty cycle of 150 % for 60 s or 160 % for 10 s. IH DC 60 s 300 s Drive output current 10 s 1.6 x IH t Short-time current 160 % 1.5 x IH G_D213_EN_00079 Irated IL t Short-time current 150 % Rated current (continuous) IH 60 s G_D213_EN_00036 Base load current IH for high overload Irated 300 s t High overload Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/7 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Control units Overview • The SINAMICS Control Unit can handle simple technological tasks by itself • The CU320-2 DP or CU320-2 PN Control Units are used in conjunction with all Motor Modules or Line Modules for single or multi-motor drives. • Sophisticated motion control tasks can be implemented with the support of the more powerful, performance graded Control Units D410-2, D425-2, D435-2 and D445-2 of SIMOTION D. Refer to Catalog PM 21 for information on SIMOTION. Each of these Control Units is based on an object-oriented SINAMICS standard firmware, which contains all the most popular control modes and can be scaled to meet even the most advanced performance requirements. New system architecture with a central control module 6 In multi-axis drives, the individual drives are controlled from the higher-level control systems in such a way as to achieve the desired coordinated movement. This requires cyclic data exchange between the controller and the drives. In previous drive designs, this exchange took place via a field bus, requiring complex installation and configuration. SINAMICS takes a new approach in this respect: A central control module can control the drives for multiple axes and also establishes the technological links between the drives and/ or axes. Since all the required data is stored in the central control module, it does not need to be transferred. Inter-axis connections can be established within a Control Unit and easily configured in the STARTER commissioning tool using a mouse. The drive controls are supplied as ready-to-configure drive objects: • Vector control - Speed-controlled drives with high speed and torque stability in general mechanical engineering systems - Particularly suitable for induction motors • Servo control - Drives with highly dynamic motion control - Angular-locked synchronism with isochronous PROFIBUS/PROFINET - For use in machine tools and clocked production machines The most commonly used V/Hz control modes are stored in the “Vector control” drive object and are ideal for implementing even simple applications such as group drives with SIEMOSYN motors. Overview of key open-loop and closed-loop control functions. Closed-loop control types S120 Open-loop control types S120 Main functions S120 for booksize/chassis Comment, note Vector control • Induction motor - Torque control with/without encoder - Speed control with/without encoder • Torque motor (permanent magnet synchronous motor) - Torque control with encoder - Speed control with/without encoder • For induction and torque motors - Position control with encoder - Linear V/Hz characteristic - Constant-frequency V/Hz characteristic (textile) - Independent voltage setpoint input • Data set changeover • Extended setpoint input • Motor identification • Current/speed controller optimization • Technology controller • Basic positioner • Automatic restart • Flying restart with /without encoder • Kinetic buffering • Synchronization • Droop • Brake control Mixed operation with V/Hz control modes is possible; it is for this reason that the V/Hz control modes are stored only once in the “Vector control” drive object. Position control can be selected as a function module from both Servo and Vector mode. Permanent-magnet 1FW4 synchronous motors can be operated over the complete operating range in Vector control. Servo control • Induction motor - Torque control with/without encoder - Speed control with/without encoder • Synchronous motor, linear motor and torque motor - Torque control with encoder - Speed control with/without encoder • For all motor types - Position control with encoder - Linear V/Hz characteristic - Constant-frequency V/Hz characteristic (textile) - Independent voltage setpoint input • Data set changeover • Setpoint input • Motor identification • Damping application • Technology controller • Basic positioner • Brake control Mixed operation with V/Hz control modes is possible; it is for this reason that the V/Hz control modes are stored only once in the “Vector control” drive object. Position control can be selected as a function module from both Servo and Vector mode. 6/8 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Control units Overview Drive objects A drive object is a self-contained software function with its own parameters and, if necessary, its own fault messages and alarms. Drive objects Control Unit On-board I/O evaluation Infeed control Drive control ... Drive control Option Board evaluation Terminal Module evaluation ... Terminal Module evaluation Line Module Motor Module Motor Module Comprehensive package of open-loop and closed-loop control functions A wide variety of standard functions such as setpoint input, data set changeover, controller optimization, kinetic buffering, etc. ensure a high degree of functional reliability and excellent flexibility when addressing the application. BICO technology Every drive object contains a large number of input and output variables which can be freely and independently interconnected using Binector Connector Technology (BICO). A binector is a logic signal which can assume the value 0 or 1. A connector is a numerical value, e.g. the actual speed or current setpoint. Drive Control Chart (DCC) Drive Control Chart (DCC) is an additional option for the easy configuration of technological functions for SINAMICS. The block library encompasses a large selection of closedloop, arithmetic and logic blocks, as well as a more comprehensive range of open-loop and closed-loop control functions. The user friendly DCC Editor enables easy graphics-based configuration, allows control loop structures to be clearly represented and provides a high degree of reusability of diagrams that have already been created. DCC is an add-on to the STARTER commissioning tool. CompactFlash card The functions of the drives are stored on a CompactFlash card. This card contains the firmware and parameter settings for all drives in the form of a project. The CompactFlash card can also hold additional projects, which means that the correct project can be accessed immediately when series machines of different types are commissioned. When the Control Unit has booted, the data on the CompactFlash card is read and loaded to the RAM. Terminal Module Terminal Module G_D211_EN_00057a Option Board Integral safety functions (Safety Integrated) The Control Units support an extensive range of safety functions. The integrated safety functions are the Safety Integrated Basic functions • STO = Safe Torque Off • SBC = Safe Brake Control • SS1 = Safe Stop 1 (Time controlled) and the Safety Integrated Extended functions that require a license • STO = Safe Torque Off • SS1 = Safe Stop 1 (time and acceleration controlled) • SS2 = Safe Stop 2 • SOS = Safe Operating Stop • SLS = Safely Limited Speed • SSM = Safe Speed Monitor • SDI = Safe Direction If the integrated safety functions are used, licenses, supplementary system components such as TM54F Terminal Modules, or suitable safety controls may be necessary. Diagnostics optimally supported by trace function The time characteristics of input and output variables associated with drive objects can be measured by the integrated trace function and displayed using the STARTER commissioning tool. Several signals can be simultaneously traced. A recording can be triggered as a function of freely selectable boundary conditions, e.g. the value of an input or output variable. The firmware is organized in objects. Drive objects are used to implement open-loop and closed-loop control functions for Line Modules, Motor Modules, Power Modules and other system components connected by DRIVE-CLiQ. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/9 6 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Control units Function Software and protective functions A selection of commonly used standard functions is described below: Software and protective functions 6 Description Setpoint input The setpoint can be input both internally and externally. It is applied internally as a fixed set point, motorized potentiometer setpoint or jog setpoint and externally via the communications interface or an analog input on the customer terminal block. The internal fixed setpoint and the motorized potentiometer setpoint can be switched over or adjusted using control commands from any interface. Motor identification The automatic motor identification function makes commissioning faster and easier and optimizes closed-loop control of the drive. Ramp-function generator A user-friendly ramp-function generator with separately adjustable ramp up and ramp down times, together with adjustable rounding times in the lower and upper speed ranges, allows the drive to be smoothly accelerated and braked. This results in a good speed control response and plays its role in reducing the stress on the mechanical system. The down ramp can be parameterized separately for a quick stop. Vdc max controller The Vdc max controller automatically prevents overvoltages in the DC link if the down ramp is too short, for example. This may also extend the set ramp-down time. Comment: This function only makes sense for single-axis applications. Kinetic buffering (KIP) For brief line supply failures, the kinetic energy of the rotating machine is used to buffer the DC bus and therefore prevents fault trips. The drive converter remains operational as long as the drive can provide regenerative energy as a result of its motion and the DC link voltage does not drop below the shutdown threshold. When the line supply recovers within this time, the drive is again bumplessly accelerated up to its setpoint speed. Automatic restart The automatic restart switches the drive on again when the power is restored after a power failure, and ramps up to the current speed setpoint. Flying restart The flying restart function allows the drive to be switched to a motor that is still turning. Technology controller Using the technology controller (PID controller) function module, level or flow controls and complex tension controls can be implemented, for example. The existing D component can act both on the system deviation as well as on the actual value (factory setting). The P, I, and D components are separately set. Free function blocks Using the freely programmable function blocks, it is easy to implement logic and arithmetic functions for controlling the SINAMICS drive. The blocks can be programmed by means of an operator panel or the STARTER commissioning tool. Drive Control Chart (DCC) Drive Control Chart (DCC) is an additional tool for the easy configuration of technological functions for SINAMICS. The block library contains a large selection of control, arithmetic and logic blocks as well as extensive open-loop and closed loop control functions. The user-friendly DCC Editor enables easy graphics-based configuration, allows control loop structures to be clearly represented and provides a high degree of reusability of diagrams that have already been created. DCC is an add-on to the STARTER commissioning tool ( Tools and engineering). I 2t detection for motor protection A motor model in the drive firmware calculates the motor temperature based on the current speed and load. More exact sensing of the temperature, which also takes into account the influence of the ambient temperature, is possible by means of direct temperature sensing using KTY84 sensors in the motor winding. Motor temperature evaluation Motor protection by evaluating a KTY84, PTC or Pt100 temperature sensor. When a KTY84 temperature sensor is connected, the limit values can be set for alarm or shutdown. When a PTC thermistor is connected, the system reaction to triggering of the thermistor (alarm or shutdown) can be defined. Motor blocking protection A blocked motor is detected and protected against thermal overloading by a fault trip. Power unit protection Power unit protection Description Ground fault monitoring at the output A ground fault at the output end is detected by an aggregate current monitor and results in shutdown in grounded-neutral systems. Electronic shortcircuit protection at the output A short-circuit at the output (e.g. at the drive output terminals, in the motor cable or in the motor terminal box) is detected and the drive shuts down with a “fault.” Thermal overload protection An alarm is issued first when the overtemperature threshold responds. If the temperature continues to rise, the unit either shuts down or independently adjusts the pulse frequency or output current so that thermal load is reduced. Once the cause of the fault has been eliminated (e.g. cooling has been improved), the original operating values are automatically resumed. 6/10 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules CU320-2 Control Unit Overview • 1 interface for the BOP20 Basic Operator Panel • 1 slot for the CompactFlash card on which firmware and parameters are stored • 1 slot for mounting an option module (e.g. TB30 Terminal Board or CBE20 Communications Board Ethernet) • 2 rotary coding switches for manually setting the PROFIBUS address • 1 Ethernet interface for commissioning and diagnostics • 3 test sockets and one reference ground for commissioning support • 1 connection for the electronics power supply via the 24 V DC supply connector • 1 PE/protective conductor connection • 1 ground connection A shield connection for the signal cable shield on the option module is located on the CU320-2 Control Unit. The communication, open-loop and closed-loop control functions for one or more Line Modules and/or Motor Modules are executed in the CU320-2 Control Unit. Two versions of the CU320-2 Control Unit are available, with different bus communication protocols: The available option slot is used to expand the interfaces, e.g. terminals or communication. The status of the CU320-2 Control Unit is indicated via multi-color LEDs. - CU320-2 DP (option K90) with one PROFIBUS interface with PROFIdrive profile As the firmware and parameter settings are stored on a plug-in CompactFlash card, the Control Unit can be changed without the need for software tools. - CU320-2 PN (option K95) with a PROFINET interface with PROFIdrive profile Integration Additional bus communication protocols are available by inserting a communications module in the option slot. Design The CU320-2 Control Unit has the following interfaces as standard: • 4 x DRIVE-CLiQ sockets for communication with other DRIVE-CLiQ nodes, e.g. Motor Modules, Active Line Modules, Sensor Modules, Terminal Modules • 12 parameterizable digital inputs (isolated) • 8 parameterizable bidirectional digital inputs/digital outputs (non-floating) • 1 serial RS232 interface (e.g. to connect the AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel) DRIVE-CLiQ components such as Motor Modules and Active Line Modules can be connected to a CU320-2 Control Unit. The number of modules depends on the performance required, including duty type and additional functions. The CU320-2 Control Unit and other connected components are commissioned and diagnosed using the STARTER commissioning tool from Version 4.1 SP5 and the installed SINAMICS Support Package SSP_SINAMICS_V4_3_2 or the AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel. The BOP20 Basic Operator Panel can also be snapped onto the CU320-2 Control Unit during operation for troubleshooting. The CU320-2 Control Unit requires a CompactFlash card with firmware. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/11 6 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules CU320-2 Control Unit Technical data CU320-2 Control Unit 6 Current demand, max. At 24 V DC, without taking into account digital outputs, expansion option slot and DRIVE-CLiQ supply 1.0 A Digital inputs In accordance with IEC 61131-2 Type 1 12 isolated digital inputs 8 bidirectional non-isolated digital inputs/digital outputs -3 … +30 V -3 … +5 V 15 … 30 V 9 mA • Voltage • Low level (an open digital input is interpreted as “low”) • High level • Current consumption at 24 V DC, typ. • Delay time of digital inputs1), approx. -L H -H L • Delay time of high-speed digital inputs1), approx. -L H -H L • Conductor cross-section, max. Digital outputs Continuously short-circuit proof • Voltage • Load current per digital output, max. • Delay time 1), typ./max. -L H -H L • Conductor cross-section, max. Power loss Conformity Approvals, according to 50 s 100 s 5 s 50 s #14 AWG (1.5 mm2) 8 bidirectional non-isolated digital inputs/digital outputs 24 V DC 500 mA 150 s/400 s 75 s/100 s #14 AWG (1.5 mm2) 24 W CE cULus 1) The specified delay times refer to the hardware. The actual reaction time depends on the time slot in which the digital input or output is processed. Overview Design A CU320-2 Control Unit can perform the communication, open loop and closed-loop control functions for several power units. The computing capacity requirement increases in proportion to the number of power units and system components and in relation to the dynamic response required. The computing capacity requirement and utilization of the CU320-2 Control Unit can be calculated with the SIZER for Siemens Drives engineering tool. The full computing capacity of the CU320-2 Control Unit is only available on systems with performance expansion (option K94). For the CU320-2 Control Unit, the performance expansion is necessary from the 4th axis. The CompactFlash card contains the firmware and parameter settings. The CompactFlash card is plugged into the appropriate slot on the CU320-2 Control Unit 6/12 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 In addition to the firmware, the CompactFlash card also contains licensing codes that are required to enable firmware options (currently, the performance expansion and the Safety Integrated Extended Functions). The Safety Integrated Extended Functions must be ordered for each axis via option codes (K01 to K05). SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules CBE20 Communication Board Overview SINAMICS Link SINAMICS Link can be used to directly exchange data between several CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS) or CU320-2 PN (PROFINET) Control Units without using a higher-level control system. Possible applications for the SINAMICS Link include: • Torque sharing for several drives • Setpoint cascading for several drives • Load distribution for drives coupled through a material web • Coordination between SINAMICS G or SINAMICS S with the CU320-2 Control Unit and SINAMICS DC Master with CUD Control Units. Only CU320-2 Control Units or CUD Control Units of the SINAMICS DC Master can be integrated into this communication network. The CBE20 Communication Board (option G33) is required, if • a CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS) Control Unit, is to be connected to a PROFINET-IO network • a CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS) or CU320-2 PN (PROFINET) Control Unit is to be connected to an EtherNet/IP network • SINAMICS Link is to be used to directly exchange data between several CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS) or CU320-2 PN (PROFINET) Control Units without using a higher-level control system. The CBE20 is parameterized to operate in one of these modes. In addition, the CBE20 allows Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication for engineering processes using the STARTER commissioning tool on a PROFINET or EtherNet/IP network: SINAMICS Link is activated by appropriately parameterizing the Control Units of the participants. Integration The CBE20 Communication Board plugs into the option slot on the CU320-2 Control Unit. Technical data CBE20 Communication Board Current demand at 24 V DC 0.16 A Conformity CE Approvals, according to cULus 6 PROFINET With the CBE20 Communication Board, SINAMICS S120 is a PROFINET IO device in the sense of PROFINET and can perform the following functions: • PROFINET IO device • 100 Mbit/s full duplex • Supports real-time classes of PROFINET IO: - RT (Real-Time) - IRT (Isochronous Real-Time), minimum send cycle 500 s • Connects to controls as PROFINET IO devices according to the PROFIdrive profile • Integrated 4-port switch with four RJ45 sockets based on the PROFINET ASIC ERTEC400. The optimum topology (line, star, tree) can therefore be configured without additional external switches. EtherNet/IP EtherNet/IP (EtherNet Industrial Protocol) is an open standard predominantly used in the automation industry. EtherNet/ IP is supported by the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA). Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/13 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules BOP20 Basic Operator Panel Overview BOP20 Basic Operator Panel The BOP20 Basic Operator Panel can be snapped onto a CU320-2 Control Unit and may be used to acknowledge faults, set parameters and read diagnostic information (e.g. alarm and fault messages). Design The BOP20 Basic Operator Panel has a backlit two-line display area and 6 keys. 6 The integrated plug connector on the rear side of the BOP20 Basic Operator Panel provides the power to the BOP20 Basic Operator Panel and the communication with the CU320-2 Control Unit. Selection and ordering data Description Order No. BOP20 Basic Operator Panel 6SL3055-0AA00-4BA0 6/14 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 CU320-2 Control Unit with inserted BOP20 Basic Operator Panel SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel Overview • Two-stage safety concept to protect against accidental or unauthorized changes to settings. - Operation of the drive from the operator panel can be disabled by the keyboard lock so that only parameter values and process variables can be displayed on the operating panel. - A password can be used to prevent the unauthorized modification of drive parameters. • Front panel with degree of protection IP55 If just one CU320-2 Control Unit controls several power units (multi-motor operation), then the parameters, alarms and faults relating to all the devices connected can be displayed and processed. Function The AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel can be added to a CU320-2 Control Unit (option K08), and is mounted in the cabinet door. It has the following features and characteristics: • Graphical backlit LCD display (240 × 64 pixels) for plain text, bar graphs or trend of process variables • LEDs for display of operating modes • Help function describing causes of and remedies for faults and alarms • 26-key membrane keyboard for operational control of a drive • Local/remote switchover for selecting the operating location (priority assigned to operator panel or customer terminal block/PROFIBUS/PROFINET) • Numeric keypad for input of setpoint or parameter values • Function keys for prompted navigation in the menu • 4 LEDs to signal the operating state of the drive: - RUN: green - ALARM: yellow - FAULT: red - Local/Remote: green The current operating states, setpoints and actual values, parameters, indices, faults and alarms are displayed on the display panel. Chinese, German, English, French, Italian and Spanish are stored on the CU320-2 Control Unit CompactFlash card as operator panel languages. The desired language must be downloaded to the AOP30 prior to commissioning. On request, Russian, Polish, and Czech are available in addition to these languages installed as standard. These can be downloaded free of charge from the Internet under the following link: http://support.automation.siemens.com Technical data AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel Current demand at 24 V DC 0.16 A Conformity CE Approvals, according to cULus Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/15 6 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Customer Terminal Block -X55 Design Overview To connect signal cables on the customer side, terminal block -X55 includes terminals -X122, -X132, -X41 and -X46 (terminals -X1 to -X4 are used inside the cabinet and are not available). As a consequence, depending on the version (with/without option K90 or K95) the following digital inputs/ outputs and/or signals are available: The customer terminal block -X55 includes: Motor Modules chassis format Line Modules Without Without with with CU320-2 (K90/K95) CU320-2 (K90/K95) 12 digital inputs DI – – 8 bidirectional inputs/outputs (DI/DO) – – G_D213_XX_00078a -X122, -X132 Customer terminal block -X55 represents the interface to the I/O devices and marshals a range of cabinet-internal signals to a central terminal block module mounted in the lower part of the cabinet. 6 It can be used for Motor Modules in the chassis format as well as together with options K90 (CU320-2 DP Control Unit) or K95 (CU320-2 PN Control Unit) for Basic Line Modules, Smart Line Modules, Active Line Modules and Booksize Cabinet Kits. 1) -X41 Connection, safety function Safe Torque Off/Safe Stop 1 – 1) – 1) Connection temperature sensor KTY84/PTC/Pt100 – 1) – 1) – – -X46 Connection, Safe Brake Adapter For Booksize Cabinet Kits, a connection is provided at the separate customer terminal block -X55.1 or -X55.2. 6/16 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Customer Terminal Block – X55 Overview Pin assignment Customer terminal block - X55 -X122 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16 DI17 M1 M DI/DO8 DI/DO9 M DI/DO10 DI/DO11 M -X132 +24 V DC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI20 DI21 M2 M DI/DO12 DI/DO13 M DI/DO14 DI/DO15 M 1 2 3 4 EP M1 EP +24V - Temp + Temp 1 2 3 4 BR Output + BR Output FB Input + FB Input - -X41 Function STO/ SS1 -X46 Interface to Safe Brake Adapter G_D213_EN_00071a Interface to Chassis Power Unit Interface to Control Unit CU320-2 Terminal block -X55-X122 digital inputs/outputs Terminal assignment of customer terminal block -X55 Terminal Designation 1) Technical data 1 2 3 4 5 6 DI 0 DI 1 DI 2 DI 3 DI 16 DI 17 Voltage -30 V to +30 V DC Current drain, typical: 9 mA at 24 V DC Electrical isolation: Terminal M1 is the reference potential Level (including ripple): High level: 15 V ... 30 V Low level: -30 V ... +5 V Input delay (typ.): at 0 → 1: 50 s at 1 → 0: 150 s 7 M1 Reference potential for terminals 1 to 6 8 M Ground 9 10 11 12 13 14 DI/DO 8 DI/DO 9 As input: Voltage -30 V ... +30 V DC Current drain, typical: 9 mA at 24 V DC Level (including ripple): High level: 15 V ... 30 V Low level: -30 V ... +5 V Fast inputs: 2) DI/DO 8, 9, 10 and 11 Input delay (typ.): at 0 → 1: 5 s at 0 → 0: 50 s As output: Voltage 24 V DC Max. load current for each output: 500 mA continuously short-circuit proof Output delay (typ./max.): 3) at 0 → 1: 150 s/400 s at 1 → 0: 75 s/100 s Switching frequency: For resistive load: max. 100 Hz For inductive load: max. 0.5 Hz For lamp load: max. 10 Hz Max. lamp load: 5 W M DI/DO 10 DI/DO 11 M Maximum wire size: #14 AWG (1.5 mm2) Terminal assignment of customer terminal block -X55 1) DI: Digital input DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output M: Electronics ground M1: Reference ground 2) Can be used as measuring probe input or input for the external zero mark. 3) Data for: Ucc = 24 V; load 48 ; High (1) = 90 % Uout ; Low (0) = 10 % Uout. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/17 6 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Customer Terminal Block – X55 Design Terminal block -X55-X132 digital inputs/outputs Terminal Designation 1 2 3 4 5 6 DI 4 DI 5 DI 6 DI 7 DI 20 DI 21 1) Technical data Terminal Function Technical data Voltage -30 V to +30 V DC Current drain, typical: 9 mA at 24 V DC Electrical isolation: Terminal M2 is the reference potential Level (including ripple): High level: 15 V ... 30 V Low level: -30 V ... +5 V Input delay (typ.): at 0 → 1: 50 s at 1 → 0: 150 s 1 EP M1 (enable pauses) EP +24 V (enable pauses) Supply voltage 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V) Current drain: 10 mA Signal propagation times: L → H: 100 s H → L: 1000 s The pulse inhibit function is only provided if Safety Integrated Basic Functions have been enabled - Temp + Temp Temperature sensor connection for motor temperature sensing: KTY84-1C130, PTC, Pt100 7 M2 Reference potential for terminals 1 to 6 8 M Ground 9 10 11 12 13 14 DI/DO 12 DI/DO 13 M DI/DO 14 DI/DO 15 M As input: Voltage -30 V ... +30 V DC Current drain, typical: 9 mA at 24 V DC Level (including ripple): High level: 15 V ... 30 V Low level: -30 V ... +5 V Fast inputs: 2) DI/DO 12, 13, 14 and 15 Input delay (typ.): at 0 → 1: 5 s at 0 → 0: 50 s As output: Voltage 24 V DC Max. load current for each output: 500 mA continuously short-circuit proof Output delay (typ./max.): 3) at 0 → 1: 150 /400 s at 1 → 0: 75 s/100 s Switching frequency: For resistive load: max. 100 Hz For inductive load: max. 0.5 Hz For lamp load: max. 10 Hz Max. lamp load: 5 W 6 Maximum wire size: #14 AWG (1.5 mm2) 1) DI: Digital input DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output M: Electronics ground M2: Reference ground 2) Can be used as measuring probe input or input for the external zero mark. 3) Data for: Ucc = 24 V; load 48 ; High (1) = 90 % Uout ; Low (0) = 10 % Uout. 6/18 Terminal block -X55-X41 temperature sensor connection Siemens D21.7 – 2013 2 3 4 Maximum wire size: #12 AWG (2.5 mm2) Terminal block -X55-X46 brake control and monitoring Terminal Function Technical data 1 2 3 4 BR output + BR output FB input + FB input - The interface is used to connect the Safe Brake Adapter Maximum wire size: #14 AWG (1.5 mm2) SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules SMC10 Sensor Module Overview Technical Technicaldata data SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted The SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted (option K46) is required to evaluate the encoder signals of motors without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface. External encoders can also be connected via the SMC10. The following encoder signals can be evaluated: • 2-pole resolver • Multipole resolver Design The SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted features the following interfaces as standard: Current demand, max. At 24 V DC, without taking encoder into account 0.2 A Power loss max. 10 W Encoders which can be evaluated • 2-pole resolver • Multipole resolver • Excitation voltage, rms 4.1 V • Excitation frequency 5 ... 10 kHz depending on the current controller clock cycle of the Motor Module or Power Module • Transformation ratio 0.5 • Encoder frequency, max. 2 kHz (120,000 rpm) depending on the pole pair number of the resolver and the current controller clock cycle of the Motor Module or Power Module • Signal subdivision (interpolation), max. 16,384 times (14 bit) • Cable length to encoder, max. 426 ft (130 m) Conformity CE Approvals, according to cULus 6 • 1 encoder connection including motor temperature detection (KTY84-130 or PTC) via SUB-D connector The status of the SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted is indicated via a multi-color LED. The signal cable shield can be connected via the encoder system and can also be connected to the SMC10 Sensor Module via shield connection terminal, e.g. Phoenix Contact type SK8 or Weidmüller type KLBÜ CO 1., Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/19 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules SMC20 Sensor Module Overview Technical Technicaldata data SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted Current demand, max. At 24 V DC, without taking encoder into account 0.2 A Power loss max. Encoders which can be evaluated 10 W • Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 V pp • EnDat absolute encoder • Encoder supply The SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted (option K48) is required to evaluate the encoder signals of motors without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface. External encoders can also be connected via the SMC20. 6 The following encoder signals can be evaluated: • Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp • EnDat absolute encoder • SSI encoder with TTL/HTL incremental signals sin/cos 1 Vpp (firmware version 2.4 and later) • SSI encoder without incremental signals The motor temperature can also be detected with KTY84-130 or PTC thermistors. Design The SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted features the following interfaces as standard: • 1 encoder connection including motor temperature detection (KTY84-130 or PTC) via SUB-D connector or terminals The status of the SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted is indicated via a multi-color LED. The signal cable shield can be connected via the encoder system and can also be connected to the SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Module via shield connection terminal, e.g. Phoenix Contact type SK8 or Weidmüller type KLBÜ CO 1. 6/20 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 • SSI encoder with incremental mental signals sin/cos 1 V pp (firmware version 2.4 and later) 5 V DC/0.35 A • Encoder frequency incremental signals, max • Signal subdivision (interpolation), max. • SSI baud rate • Cable length to encoder, max. 500 kHz PE connection M4 screw Conformity CE Approvals, according to cULus 16,384 times (14 bit) 100kBaud 426 ft (130 m) SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules SMC30 Sensor Module Overview Technical data SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted Current demand, max. At 24 V DC, without taking encoder into account 0.2 A Power loss max. Encoders which can be evaluated 10 W • Incremental encoder TTL/HTL • SSI encoder with TTL/HTL incremental signals • SSI encoder without incremental signals • Input impedence - TTL - HTL, max. • Encoder supply The SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted (options K50 and K52) is required to evaluate the encoder signals of motors without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface. External encoders can also be connected via the SMC30. The following encoder signals can be evaluated: • Incremental encoders TTL/HTL with/without open-circuit detection (open-circuit detection is only available with bipolar signals) • SSI encoder with TTL/HTL incremental signals • SSI encoder without incremental signals • Encoder frequency max. • SSI baud rate 570 16 mA 24 V DC/0.35 A or 5 V DC/0.35 A 300 kHz 100 ... 250 kBaud • Limiting frequency, max. 300 kHz • Resolution absolute position SSI 30 bit • Cable length, max. - TTL encoder - HTL encoder The motor temperature can also be detected with KTY84-130 or PTC thermistors. Design The SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted features the following interfaces as standard: • 1 encoder connection including motor temperature detection (KTY84-130 or PTC) via SUB-D connector or terminals - SSI encoder 330 ft (100 m) (only bipolar signals permitted) 1) 330 ft (100 m) for unipolar signals 990 ft (300 m) for bipolar signals 1) 330 ft (100 m) Conformity CE Approvals, according to cULus 1) Signal cables twisted in pairs and shielded. The status of the SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted is indicated via a multi-color LED. The maximum encoder cable length between SMC30 modules and encoders is 330 ft (100 m). For HTL encoders, this length can be increased to 990 ft (300 m) if the A*, A and B*, B signals are evaluated and the power supply cable has a minimum cross-section of #20 AWG (0.5 mm2). The signal cable shield can be connected to the SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted via a shield connection terminal, e.g. Phoenix Contact type SK8 or Weidmüller type KLBÜ CO 1. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/21 6 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules TM150 Terminal (RTD) Module Overview Technical data TM150 Terminal Module Current demand at 24 V DC The TM150 RTD module (option G51 to G54 in the Line Connection Module) is suitable for monitoring a variety of temperature sensors, over the temperature range -146°F (-99°C) to +480°F (+250°C): 6 • Pt100 - Platinum RTD 100 ohm • Pt1000 - Platinum RTD 1,000 ohm • KTY84 - temperature sensor • PTC - Positive temperature coefficient thermistor • Temperature switch (NC) contact (for example Thermoclick or bimetallic switch) Up to 12 sensors in 2-wire connection or up to 6 sensors in 3- or 4-wire connection can be connected to one TM150. The TM150 detects wire breakage or a short circuit in the RTD leads for Pt100, Pt1000 and KTY84 sensors, and short circuit for PTC thermistors. Temperature values from the TM150 are available for further processing. Motor winding temperatures can be used for the thermal motor model in the closed loop control. Temperature values can be displayed on the AOP30, and transmitted to the process control system via bus communications. Note: TM150 inputs are not galvanically isolated. Only temperature sensors isolated per IEC 61800-5-1 may be connected to terminals “+Temp” and “-Temp”. Failure to observe these instructions can result in electric shock! 6/22 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 0.5 A Conformity CE Approvals, according to cULus SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module Overview Technical data VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module Current demand, max. at 24 V DC 0.2 A Power loss <5 W Line voltage detection • Input resistance - Terminal X521 - Terminal X522 > 362 kΩ/phase > 2.5 MΩ/phase Conformity CE Approvals, according to cULus The VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module (option K51) allows the line supply or motor voltage characteristic to be precisely sensed. The VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module is integrated in Active Interface Modules chassis format and in Smart Line Modules chassis format. In addition, the VSM10 is used to switch to a rotating synchronous motor (flying restart function). Design 6 The VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module has the following interfaces: • 1 connection for direct voltage sensing up to 690 V • 1 connection for voltage sensing using voltage transformers, max.100 V 3 ph. • 2 analog inputs (reserved for resonance monitoring in Active Interface Modules) • 1 temperature sensor input (KTY84-130 or PTC) The status of the VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module is indicated by a two-color LED. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/23 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Connection system Signal cables Overview MOTION-CONNECT pre-assembled cables are used whenever motor encoders on motors without DRIVECLiQ interface are connected to Sensor Modules. Note: All 6FX.002-2C... signal cables are also available with crimped contacts and connector housing supplied as a separate accessory. • Signal cables with connector (supplied as loose part) for the motor end. In this case, the 6th position of the Order No. must be changed from 0 to 4: 6FX.042-2C...-.... • Signal cables with connector (supplied as loose part) for the module end. In this case, the 6th position of the Order No. must be changed from 0 to 1: 6FX.012-2C...-.... MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cable Integration Signal cables are pre-assembled and are sold by the meter for the connection of a variety of components. • DRIVE-CLiQ cables • MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables • MOTION-CONNECT pre-assembled cables Connection overview for the CU320-2 Control Unit Applications 6 Pre-assembled signal cables Control Unit CU320-2 Active X400- Line X100- 6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0 X402 Module X103 or 6FX2002-1DC00-.... < 70 m(230 ft) DRIVE-CLiQ cables are used to connect components with DRIVE-CLiQ connections which have a separate or external 24 V DC power supply. DRIVE-CLiQ cables for connecting Line/Motor Modules with a Control Unit are part of the scope of supply of the relevant Cabinet Modules only if the control unit is mounted inside the respective Module (option K90 or K95), or if integration engineering is provided by the factory. MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables are used whenever components with DRIVE-CLiQ connections must meet high requirements such as mechanical stress and oil resistance, e.g. when connections are made outside the cabinet between • Motor Modules and Sensor Modules • Motor Modules and motors with DRIVE-CLiQ interface MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables have 24 V DC cores 6/24 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0 or 6FX2002-1DC00-.... X100X103 6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0 or 6FX2002-1DC00-. . . . < 70 m (230 ft) X100- 6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0 X103 or 6FX2002-1DC00-. . . . < 70 m (230 ft) X126 X140 Basic or X400- Line X402 Module Active X500 Interface Module X400- Motor X403 Module X500-Terminal X501 Modules PROFIBUS connector 6ES7972-0BA42-0XA0 (without PG-connector) or 6ES7972-0BB42-0XA0 (with PG connector) 6FX8002-1AA01-1AF0 PC/PG G_D211_EN_00015 c SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Connection system Signal cables Integration Connection overview for Line Modules and Motor Modules The DRIVE-CLiQ type 6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0 cables for the standard configuration are part of the scope of supply of the Line Modules and Motor Modules only if the control unit is mounted inside the respective Module (option K90 or K95), or if integration engineering is provided by the factory. Motor Module chassis format Order No. Pre-assembled signal cables 6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0 X400- ≤ 5 m (16 ft) X402 6FX2002-1DC00-.... ≤ 70 m (230 ft) 6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0 X400- ≤ 5 m (16 ft) X402 6FX2002-1DC00-.... ≤ 70 m (230 ft) Active Line Module X400X402 Smart Line Module X400X402 Basic Line Module X100X103 Control Unit CU320-2 X400X402 Motor Module 6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0 6FX2002-1DC00-.... X500 Active Interface Module Motion Controller SIMOTION D or X400X402 Further Motor Modules 6 Motor encoder interface via SMC for motors without DRIVE-CLiQ interface 6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0 X400- ≤ 5 m (16 ft) X402 6FX2002-1DC00-.... ≤ 70 m (230 ft) Motor encoder interface for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ interface X400X402 X400X402 6FX5002- 2DC10-.... ≤ 100 m (328 ft) 6FX8002- 2DC10-.... ≤ 50 m (164 ft) X500 SMC101) X500 SMC201) X500 SMC301) Absolute encoder with DRIVE-CLiQ 6FX2001-5.D.. Motor encoder for DRIVE-CLiQ interface 1FK/1FT/1PH/1PL6 G_D213_EN_00076b SINAMICS S120 1) See connection overviews SMC10/SMC20/SMC30. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/25 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Connection system Signal cables Integration Connection overview for connecting Sensor Modules to Line Modules and Motor Modules Motor Module Power Module chassis format Order-No. Pre-assembled signal cables X500 SMC10 X520 Motor encoder interface via SMC for motors without DRIVE-CLiQ interface X400X402 X500 SMC20 X520 6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0 6FX.002-2CF02-.... 50 m (164 ft) (multi-pole resolver) 130 m (427 ft) (2-pole resolver) Resolver in 1FT/1FK/1FW3/ 1PH7/1PL6 motor 6FX.002-2CA31-.... 100 m (328 ft) Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp with C/D track in 1FT/1FK/1FW3/1PH7/1PH4/ 1PL6/1PM motor 6FX8002-2CA80-.... 50 m (164 ft) Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp without C/D track in 1PH7/1PH4/1PL6/1PM motor 6FX.002-2CG00-.... 50 m (164 ft) Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 6FX2001-3... 6FX2002-1DC00-.... 70 m (230 ft) Adapter cable5) 6FX.002-2EQ10-.... 100 m (328 ft) 6 X500 SMC30 X520 X521 X531 X521 X531 1) 2) 3) With evaluation of difference signals A*, A and B*, B, otherwise 100 m (328 ft). Signals A*, A, B*, B, R*, R. Signals A, B. 6/26 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 Absolute encoder with EnDat in 1FT/1FK/1FW3/1PH7/ 1PH4/1PL6 motor Direct linear absolute encoder EnDat LC 183 LC 483 6FX.002-2CH00-.... 100 m (328 ft) Absolute encoder with EnDat 6FX2001-5.E. 6FX.002-2CC11-.... 100 m (328 ft) Absolute encoder with SSI 6FX2001-5.S. 6FX.002-2CR00-.... 100 m (328 ft) with 5 V DC Incremental encoder TTL RS 422 (5 V) 6FX2001-2... 6FX.002-2CD24-.... 100 m (328 ft) with 24 V DC Incremental encoder TTL RS 422 (24 V) 6FX2001-2... 6FX5002-2CA12-.... 100 m (328 ft) Incremental encoder HTL (24 V) 6FX2001-4.... 6FX.002-2AH00-.... HTL 300 m (984 ft)1) Incremental encoder HTL in 1PH7/1PH4/1PL6 motor 6SX7002-0AN00-.... 2) X521 X531 Adapter cable5) Direct linear incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp LS 187(C)/LF 183(C) LB 382(C) 3) Incremental encoder HTL 6SX7002-0AL00-.... type 1XP8001 300 m (984 ft) 1) on 1LA motor 6) 6SX7002-0AN10-.... 4) 4) With right-angled connector 5) Cable available from measuring system manufacturer. 6) Not for 2KG geared motor. G_D211_EN_00225c SINAMICS S120 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Connection system Signal cables Integration Connection of a machine encoder (direct measuring system) X100X1052) Order No. Pre-assembled cables X500 SME20 6FX5002-2DC10-.... ≤ 100 m (328 ft) 6FX8002-2DC10-.... ≤ 50 m (164 ft) X500 SME25 X520 X520 6FX.002-2CB54-.... ≤ 3 m/10 m (9.8 ft/32.8 ft)1) Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp (5 V) Absolute encoder EnDat (5 V) 6FX.002-2AD04-.... ≤ 3 m/10 m (9.8 ft/32.8 ft)1) SSI absolute encoder with incremental signals sin/cos 1 Vpp (5 V) Absolute encoder with DRIVE-CLiQ interface 6FX2001-5.D.. X100X1052) 1) 2) 6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0 ≤ 5 m (16 ft) 6FX2002-1DC00-.... ≤ 70 m (230 ft) X500 SMC30 X520 6FX.002-2CC11-.... ≤ 100 m (328 ft) Absolute encoder with SSI 6FX2001-5.S.. G_D211_EN_00153d SINAMICS S120 Control Unit CU310, CU320-2 or SIMOTION D410 SIMOTION D4x5 SIMOTION CX32 Depending on encoder current consumption. For Control Unit CU310/SIMOTION D410: X100. For Control Unit CU320-2/SIMOTION D425/SIMOTION D435/SIMOTION CX32: X100-X103. For SIMOTION D445-1: X100-X105. 6 Selection and ordering data Signal cable Length DRIVE-CLiQ pre-assembled cables (without 24 V DC cores) In specific lengths 0.11 m (4.3”) 0.16 m (6.3”) 0.21 m (8.3”) 0.26 m (10.2”) 0.31 m (12.2”) 0.36 m (14.2”) 0.41 m (16.1”) 0.60 m (23.6”) 0.95 m (37.4”) 1.20 m (47.2”) 1.45 m (57.1”) 2.80 m (9.2 ft) 5.00 m (16.4 ft) To the meter 70 m (230 ft) 70 m (230 ft) Degree of protection (connector) Basic cable Order No. IP20/IP20 6SL3060-4AB00-0AA0 6SL3060-4AD00-0AA0 6SL3060-4AF00-0AA0 6SL3060-4AH00-0AA0 6SL3060-4AK00-0AA0 6SL3060-4AM00-0AA0 6SL3060-4AP00-0AA0 6SL3060-4AU00-0AA0 6SL3060-4AA10-0AA0 6SL3060-4AW00-0AA0 6SL3060-4AF10-0AA0 6SL3060-4AJ20-0AA0 6SL3060-4AA50-0AA0 6FX2002-1DC00-…. 6FX2002-1DC20-.... IP20/IP20 IP67/IP67 DRIVE-CLiQ MOTION-CONNECT 500 cables (with 24 V DC cores) To the meter 100 m (328 ft) IP20/IP20 100 m (328 ft) IP20/IP67 100 m (328 ft) IP67/IP67 DRIVE-CLiQ MOTION-CONNECT 800 cables (with 24 V DC cores) To the meter 50 m (164 ft) IP20/IP20 50 m (164 ft) IP20/IP67 50 m (164 ft) IP67/IP67 6FX5002-2DC00-.... 6FX5002-2DC10-…. 6FX5002-2DC20-…. 6FX8002-2DC00-…. 6FX8002-2DC10-.… 6FX8002-2DC20-…. Length code (refer to the next page) …. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/27 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Connection system Signal cables Selection and ordering data Length codes Note: 1 m = 39.37” or 3.28 ft Description Order No. supplement Length codes for pre-assembled cables 6FX....-.....- 0 6SX....-.....- 6 0m 1 100 m 200 m 2 3 300 m 0m 10 m 20 m 30 m 40 m 50 m 60 m 70 m 80 m 90 m 0m 1m 2m 3m 4m 5m 6m 7m 8m 4 A B C D E F G H J K A B C D E F G H J 9m 0m 0.1 m 0.2 m 0.3 m 0.4 m 0.5 m 0.6 m 0.7 m 0.8 m Examples: 6/28 K 1.0 m: 2.2 m: 8.0 m: 299.0 m: Siemens D21.7 – 2013 1 1 1 3 A A A K B C J K 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 2 0 0 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Safety integrated Function Safety Integrated functions Safety-related standards The integrated safety functions of SINAMICS provide highly effective application-oriented protection for personnel and machinery. The Safety Integrated functions are implemented electronically and therefore offer short response times in comparison to solutions with externally implemented monitoring functions. Functional safety is specified in various standards. ISO 12100 and ISO 14121-1, for example, are concerned with the design and risk assessment of machines. IEC 62061 (only applicable for electrical and electronic control systems) and ISO 13849-1 (previously EN 954-1) define the functional and safety-related requirements of control systems with relevance to safety. The trend toward greater complexity and increasing modularity of machines is increasingly seeing a shift in safety functions away from the classical central safety functions (for example, shutdown of the complete machine using a main switch) and into the machine control system and the drives. Frequently, this also significantly increases the productivity. This is because, for instance, equipping times can be reduced and during these equipping times, depending on the machine type, other parts can still continue to produce. Integrated safety functions act much faster than those of a conventional design. The safety of a machine is increased further with Safety Integrated. Furthermore, thanks to the faster method of operation, safety measures controlled by integrated safety systems are perceived as less of a hindrance by the machine operator, therefore significantly reducing the motivation to consciously bypass safety functions. The safety functions in the device and communication via PROFIsafe have already been certified. This simplifies configuring the safety functions and especially the acceptance of the plant or system by an authorized testing body when compared to safety solutions made up of individual safety components. The above-mentioned standards define different safety requirements that the machine has to satisfy in accordance with the risk, frequency of a dangerous situation, probability of occurrence and the opportunities for recognizing impending danger. • ISO 13849-1: Control Category 1...4 • ISO 13849-1: Performance Level PL a … e • IEC 62061: Safety Integrity Level SIL 1 … 3 Safety functions integrated in the drive with SINAMICS The safety functions integrated in SINAMICS satisfy the requirements of • Control Category 3 according to ISO 13849-1 • Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 2 according to IEC 61508 • Performance Level (PL) d according to ISO 13849-1 In addition, the Safety Integrated functions of SINAMICS are generally certified by independent institutes. An up-to-date list of certified components is available on request from your local Siemens office. Legal framework Machine and plant builders must ensure that their machines or plants neither present risks due to electric shock, heat or radiation nor due to functional faults. In Europe, for example, compliance with the machinery directive is legally stipulated by the EU industrial safety directive. In order to ensure compliance with this directive, it is recommended that the corresponding harmonized European standards are applied. This initiates the assumption of conformity and gives manufacturers and operators the legal security when complying with both national regulations and EU directives. The machine manufacturer uses the CE marking to document the compliance with all relevant directives and regulations in the free movement of goods. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/29 6 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Safety integrated Function The Safety Integrated functions of the SINAMICS drive system are subdivided into what are known as Safety Basic Functions and Safety Extended Functions (terminology according to IEC 61800-5-2): • Basic Functions - Safe Torque Off (STO) - Safe Stop 1 (SS1, time-controlled) - Safe Brake Control (SBC) The Safety Basic functions are included in the standard scope of delivery of the drive firmware and can be used without requiring any additional license. The user can activate these functions at any time. An encoder is not required for their use. However, for the Safe Brake Control (SBC) function a Safe Brake Adapter (SBA) is required for chassis format Motor Modules. 6 The Safety Basic Functions are controlled as follows: - Via terminals at the Control Unit and at the power unit, wired to a terminal interface in Cabinet Modules (option K82) and on the Safe Brake Adapter (option K88), when applicable. - Via PROFIBUS or PROFINET with PROFIsafe profile (from version 3 (last position of the Order No. ≥ 3) and Drives SW Version V2.6 SP2) • Extended Functions - Safe Torque Off (STO) - Safe Stop 1 (SS1, time-controlled and acceleration controlled) - Safe Stop 2 (SS2) - Safe Operating Stop (SOS) - Safely-Limited Speed (SLS) - Safe Speed Monitor (SSM) - Safe Direction (SDI) Safety Extended Functions require a safety license depending on the axes (options K01 to K05). Depending on the control, additional DRIVE-CLiQ components are required. Note: For chassis format Motor Modules, Extended Safety Functions require: - either a sine-cosine encoder and therefore an SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted to evaluate the encoder signals (option K48). - or two incremental encoders (TTL, HTL or SSI) and therefore two SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted to evaluate the encoder signals (options K50+K52). The Safety Extended Functions are controlled as follows: - Via the TM54F Terminal Module (option K87) - Via PROFIBUS or PROFINET with the PROFIsafe profile Extended Functions are available for SINAMICS S120 Motor Modules, booksize and chassis formats from version 3 (last position of the Order No. ≥ 3). 6/30 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 The Safety Integrated functions currently available in SINAMICS S120 are described in more detail below (terms as defined in IEC 61800-5-2): Safe Torque Off (STO) Function description This function prevents unexpected starting according to EN 60204-1 Section 5.4. Safe Torque Off disables the control of the power unit, preventing a potentially hazardous torque (corresponds to Stop Category 0 according to EN 60204-1). The drive is reliably torque-free. This state is monitored internally in the drive. Under Extended Functions, STO can also be controlled via the TM54F Terminal Module or PROFIsafe. Application, customer benefits STO has the immediate effect that the drive cannot supply any torque-generating energy. STO can be used wherever the drive will naturally reach a standstill due to load torque or friction in a sufficiently short time or when “coasting down” of the drive will not have any relevance for safety. v STO G_D211_XX_00210 Safety Basic Functions and Safety Extended Functions t SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Safety integrated Function Safe Brake Control (SBC) Function description The Safe Brake Control SBC is used to control holding brakes, which are active in the no-current state, e.g. motor holding brakes (actuated using spring force). The brake is controlled through two channels in a safety-relevant fashion. Safe Brake Control is executed when activating the operational brake control, Safe Torque Off function and when safety monitoring functions respond, which cause the power unit to be safely inhibited. • Note 1: The Safe Brake Control does not detect mechanical faults in the brake, for example worn brake pads. • Note 2: For Motor Modules, Booksize Cabinet Kits format, the terminals for the motor brake are integrated. For the chassis format, an additional Safe Brake Adapter (SBA) is required (option K88, for a description see pg. 6/37). Application, customer benefits In conjunction with STO and SS1, SBC can also be activated. After switching off the torque-generating energy, SBC offers the possibility to safely control a holding brake at the motor; for example, to prevent hanging/suspended axes from sagging. Safe Stop 1 (SS1, time-controlled, without encoder; Basic Safety Function) Function description The Safe Stop 1 function can safely stop the drive in accordance with EN 60204-1, Stop Category 1. When the SS1 function is selected, the drive independently brakes along a quick stop ramp (OFF3) and Safe Torque Off and Safe Brake Control (if enabled) are activated when the selected safety delay time has expired. Application, customer benefits When activating the stop function, if the drive train does not come quickly enough to a standstill as a result of the load torque, then it can be actively braked by the drive. As a result of this integrated fast brake function, frequently it is possible to eliminate mechanical brakes which wear, or to reduce the load on them. This means that maintenance costs and stress on the machine can be reduced. STO v M M ∆t t Safe Stop 1 (SS1, time and acceleration controlled, with sine-cosine encoder; Extended Safety Function) Function description The Safe Stop 1 function can safely stop the drive in accordance with EN 60204-1, Stop Category 1. When the SS1 function is selected, the drive independently brakes along a quick stop ramp, the deceleration is monitored (OFF3) and Safe Torque Off and Safe Brake Control (if enabled) are automatically activated when the selected safety delay time has expired. Application, customer benefits When activating the stop function, if the drive train does not come quickly enough to a standstill as a result of the load torque, then it can be actively braked by the drive. As a result of this integrated fast brake function, frequently it is possible to eliminate mechanical brakes which wear, or to reduce the load on them. This means that maintenance costs and stress on the machine can be reduced. STO v G_D211_XX_00205 Brake diagnostics Motor holding brake G_D213_EN_00090 P24 G_D211_XX_00205 Safe Brake Adapter ∆t t Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/31 6 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Safety integrated Function Safe Stop 2 (SS2, with sine-cosine encoder) Safely-Limited Speed (SLS, with sine-cosine encoder) Function description Function description The Safe Stop 2 function can safely stop the drive in accordance with EN 60204-1, Stop Category 2. When the SS2 function is selected, the drive brakes autonomously along a quick stop ramp (OFF3). In contrast to SS1, the drive control remains operational afterwards, i.e. the motor can supply the full torque required to maintain the actual position. Standstill is safely monitored (Safe Operating Stop function, SOS). Using the Safely-Limited Speed function, the drive is monitored against a parameterizable maximum velocity. Four different limit values can be activated. Just the same as for SOS, the speed setpoint is not independently influenced. After SLS has been selected, the higher-level control must bring the drive to below the selected velocity limit within a parameterizable time t. Application, customer benefits Application, customer benefits When setting-up many machines operating personnel must work on the machine as it rotates. This must either be done in steps, because the dangerous area must always be exited at each start, or alternatively, the operator works at the machine while it moves and is therefore exposed to an increased risk. When using the SLS function, a considerable amount of time can be saved – and it is still guaranteed that the operating personnel are safe. For this purpose, the drive velocity can be safely limited to a safe low level. The selectable wait time until SLS is activated allows the drive control to run-down the coordinated axes in a controlled fashion. Just the same as for SS1, the drive is independently braked when the stop function is selected. Contrary to SS1, also at standstill, the drive can provide the full torque. STO G_D211_XX_00205 v ∆t SLS v G_D211_XX_00208 Safe Stop 1 (SS1) and Safe Stop 2 (SS2) with Safe Acceleration Monitor (SAM, with sine-cosine encoder) For the Extended Functions Safe Stop 1 (SS1) and Safe Stop 2 (SS2) with SAM, during braking, the acceleration is safely monitored (SAM) in order to identify faults already during the braking phase. Safe Operating Stop (SOS, with sine-cosine encoder) ∆t t Safe Operating Stop 1 (SOS), with sine-cosine encoder) Safe Speed Monitor (SSM, with sine-cosine encoder) Function description Function description The Safe Speed Monitor function supplies a safety feedback signal (high active) if the drive falls below a selectable velocity limit value. Contrary to the functions described above, there is no drive-based fault response when the limit value is exceeded. The Safe Operating Stop function constitutes safe standstill monitoring. The drive control remains in operation. The motor can therefore deliver the full torque to hold the current position. The actual position is reliably monitored. In contrast to safety functions SS1 and SS2, the speed setpoint is not influenced autonomously. After SOS has been selected, the higher-level control must bring the drive to a standstill within a parameterized safe time Δt and then hold the position setpoint. After the time t has expired, SOS is activated and monitored to ensure that the actual standstill position is not left. Application, customer benefits SOS is the ideal function for all those applications for which the machine or parts of the machine must be at a safe standstill for certain machining steps, but where the drive must also supply a holding torque. Application, customer benefits The safety SSM feedback signal can be used in a higher-level control for safety-relevant responses. The higher-level safety control can flexibly respond to the signal, depending on the particular situation, as there is no drive-based response when the limit value is exceeded. For example, using the SSM signal, a protective door can be released after a non-hazardous velocity is reached. v G_D211_XX_00209 SOS s 1 ∆t 6/32 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 G_D211_XX_00207 6 t t 0 t SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Safety integrated Function Safe Direction (SDI, with sine-cosine encoder) PROFIsafe Function description PROFIsafe is an open communication standard, that facilitates standard and safety-relevant communication along one communication path (hard-wired or wireless). As a consequence, a second, separate bus system is not required. The telegrams that are sent are continually monitored to ensure safety-relevant communication. Possible errors such as telegrams that have been lost, repeated or received in the incorrect sequence etc. are avoided. This is done by consecutively numbering the telegrams in a safety-relevant fashion, monitoring their reception within a defined time and transferring an ID for transmitter and receiver of a telegram. Further, a cyclic redundancy check CRC (cyclic redundancy check) is performed. The SDI function ensures that the drive can only rotate in the selected direction. Deviation from the direction of rotation currently being monitored is detected reliably and the configured drive-integrated fault reaction is initiated. It is possible to select which direction of rotation is to be monitored. Application, customer benefits The SDI function is used when the drive may only move in one direction. A typical application is to permit the operator access to a danger zone, as long as the machine is rotating in the safe direction, i.e. away from the operator. In this state, the operator can feed material into the work zone/remove material from the work zone without danger. The function saves the use of external components e.g. speed monitors and the associated wiring. The release of a danger zone, while the machine is moving away from the operator, increases productivity. Without the SDI function, the machine must be safely stopped during material loading and removal. SINAMICS 120 supports the PROFIsafe profile, based on PROFIBUS as well as on PROFINET. Licensing The Safety Integrated Basic Functions do not require a license. A license is, however, required for each axis with safety functions in the case of Safety Integrated Extended Functions. It is irrelevant which safety functions are used and how many. Licenses required for SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules can be ordered, depending on the axes, with safety options K01 to K05 for Motor Modules. t SDI G_PM21_XX_00116 v Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/33 6 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Safety integrated Function An overview of the SINAMICS Safety Integrated functions plus their boundary conditions is provided in the following table. Function Control Underlying function Reaction to limit overshoot Encoder required License required Safety Basic Functions STO • EP terminals on the power unit and digital input at the CU3xx/D4xx/CX32 • PROFIsafe • Terminal module (24 V to 230 V),option K82 1) SBC (if activated) – No No SS1 • EP terminals on the power unit and digital input at the CU3xx/D4xx/CX32 • PROFIsafe • Terminal module (24 V to 230 V), option K82 1) STO, after a parameterized delay time has expired STO No No SBC • Via Safe Brake Adapter 2) – – No No Safety Extended Functions 6 STO • Terminals on the TM54F 3) • PROFIsafe SBC (if activated – Yes 4) Yes (each safety axis) SS1 • Terminals on the TM54F 3) • PROFIsafe STO is activated after the shutdown conditions have been fulfilled STO Yes 4) Yes (each safety axis) SBC • Via Safe Brake Adapter – – Yes 4) Yes (each safety axis) SS2 • Terminals on the TM54F 3) STO is activated after the shutdown conditions have been fulfilled STO Yes 4) Yes (each safety axis) SLS • Terminals on the TM54F 3) • PROFIsafe Up to four maximum speeds for operation can be parameterized STO, SS1 or SOS (can be parameterized) Yes 4) Yes (each safety axis) SOS • Terminals on the TM54F 3) • PROFIsafe For closed-loop speed control: The position is monitored from standstill STO or SS1 (can Yes 4) be parameterized) Yes (each safety axis) SSM • Terminals on the TM54F 3) • PROFIsafe Safe limit value monitoring in both directions of rotation, no independent drive response. A safety-relevant signal for further operation is generated. – Yes 4) Yes (each safety axis) SDI • Terminals on the TM54F 3) • PROFIsafe – STO, SS1 or SOS (can be parameterized) Yes 4) Yes (each safety axis) 1) In addition for SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules. 2) Safe Brake Adapter has been released from firmware version 4.4. 3) For SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules as option K87. 4) The Safety Integrated Extended Functions require either a sine-cosine encoder or two incremental encoders to sense the motor speed. Possible encoder evaluation units units SMC20, SMI20, SME20/25/120/125 or SMC30. 6/34 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Safety integrated Safety integrated Function The principle of operation of Safety Integrated Two independent shutdown paths There are two shutdown paths that are independent of one another. All shutdown paths are low active. This therefore ensures that when a component fails or there is a wire break, then the system always goes into the safe state. When a fault is detected in the shutdown paths, the Safe Torque Off or Safe Stop 1 function (depending on the parameterization, also refer to the table on the Page 3/13) is activated and a restart is prevented. Two-channel monitoring structure All of the hardware and software functions important for Safety Integrated are implemented in two independent monitoring channels (e.g. shutdown paths, data management, data comparison). The safety-relevant data in the two monitoring channels is cyclically compared crosswise. The monitoring functions in each monitoring channel are based on the principle that before a particular action, there must be a defined state, and after the action there must be a specific feedback. If this expectation is not fulfilled in a monitoring channel, then the drive is shutdown through two channels and the appropriate signal output. Forced checking procedure using a test stop In order to fulfill the requirements of ISO 13849-1 (previously EN 954-1) and IEC 61508 regarding early fault detection, the functions and the shutdown paths must be tested within a specific time period at least once to ensure that they are operating correctly. This must be realized either cyclically and manually or the test stop must be automatically initiated as part of the process. The test stop cycle is monitored, and after a specific time has been exceeded, an alarm is output. A test stop does not require a power on. The acknowledgment is realized when deselecting the test stop request. When the machine is operational, it can be assumed that there is no risk for personnel as a result of the appropriate safety equipment (e.g. protective doors). As a consequence, the user is only made aware of the forced checking procedure that is required using an alarm, and is requested to perform the forced checking procedure at the next possible opportunity. Examples for performing the forced checking procedure: • When the drives are stationary after switching-on the system • Before opening the protective door • In a specified rhythm (e.g. every 8 hours) • In the automatic mode, time and event-triggered 6 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/35 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules TM54F Terminal Module Overview Design The following are located on the TM54F Terminal Module: • 4 fail-safe digital outputs • 10 fail-safe digital inputs • 4 LEDs, single color for indicating the status of the read back channel of the fail-safe digital outputs • 4 LEDs, dual-color for indicating the status of the fail-safe digital outputs • 20 LEDs, dual-color for indicating the status of the fail-safe digital inputs • 3 LEDs, single color for indicating the status of the 24 V sensor supplies • 2 connections for 24 V sensor supply, switchable • 1 connection for 24 V sensor supply, non-switchable The TM54F Terminal Module (option K87) is a dual-processor I/O interface with 4 fail-safe digital outputs and 10 fail-safe digital inputs for using Safety Integrated functions of the SINAMICS S120 drive system via external actuators and sensors. 6 All of the available safety functions integrated in the drive can be controlled via the fail-safe digital inputs of the TM54F Terminal Module. For the case that the parameterized safety functions of several drives operated together on a CU320-2 or SIMOTION D4x5 are to be executed together, then these drives can be grouped in the TM54F Terminal Module. This has the advantage that only one fail-safe digital input has to be connected for these drives. The fail-safe digital outputs and inputs have two channels with an internal crosswise data comparison via the two processors. A fail-safe digital output consists of one P-switching and one M-switching output as well as one digital input to read back the switching state. A fail-safe digital input consists of two digital inputs. Safety sensors can be connected over two switchable 24 V sensor supplies and evaluated via the fail-safe digital inputs. The switchable 24 V sensor supply ensures that the fail-safe digital inputs can be dynamized to detect dormant errors (this dynamization is used to check the shutdown paths). An nonswitchable 24 V sensor supply is additionally provided by the TM54F Terminal Module for connecting safety sensors that cannot be dynamized. The TM54F Terminal Module is connected directly to a Control Unit via DRIVE-CLiQ. Each Control Unit can only be assigned to one TM54F Terminal Module. Additional DRIVE-CLiQ nodes such as Sensor Modules and Terminal Modules (however no additional TM54F Terminal Module) can be operated on the TM54F Terminal Module. Motor Modules and Line Modules must not be connected to a TM54F Terminal Module. 6/36 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 The signal cable shield can be connected to the TM54F Terminal Module via a shield connection terminal, e.g. Phoenix Contact type SK8 or Weidmüller type KLBÜ CO 1. The shield connection terminal must not be used for strain relief. The status of the TM54F Terminal Module is indicated via a multicolor LED. Pins for connector coding are included in the TM54F Terminal Module scope of delivery. SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules TM54F Terminal Module TM54F Terminal Module Technical data TM54F Terminal Module TM54F Terminal Module Current demand (X524 at 24 V DC) without DRIVE-CLiQ supply 0.2 A Scanning cycle tSI for fail-safe digital inputs or fail-safe digital outputs 4 ... 25 ms (adjustable) Max. current demand ext. 24 V or supplying the digital outputs and 24 V sensor supply (X514 at 24 V DC) I/O devices • Number of fail-safe digital inputs • Number of fail-safe digital outputs • 24 V sensor supply 4A Conformity Approvals, according to Safety Integrated CE cULus Safety Integrity Level 2 (SIL2) acc. to IEC 61508, Performance Level d (PLd) acc. to ISO 13849-1 and Control Category 3 acc. to ISO 13849-1 (previously EN 954-1) • Connection system • Wire size, max. 10 4 3, of which 2 can be internally shut down to dynamize fail-safe digital inputs, current carrying capacity of input is 0.5 A Plug-in screw-type terminals #14 AWG (1.5 mm 2 ) Digital inputs According to IEC 61131-2 Type 1, with electrical isolation • Voltage -3 ... +30 V • Low level -3 ... +5 V (an open digital input is interpreted as “low”) • High level 15 ... 30 V 6 • Current consumption at 24V DC, typ. >2 mA • Delay time of digital inputs, approx 1) - L H, typ. 30 s - H L, typ. 60 s • Safe state Digital outputs Continuously short-circuit proof • Voltage Low level (for inputs that can be inverted: without inversion) 24 V DC • Load current per fail-safe digital output max. 2) • Delay times (resistive load) 1) 0.5 A - L H, typ. 300 s - H L, typ. 350 s • Safe state Output switched off 1) The specified delay times refer to the hardware. The actual reaction time depends on the time slot in which the digital input/output is processed. 2) The total current of all fail-safe digital outputs must not exceed 5.33 A. Siemens D21.7 – 2013 6/37 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Safe Brake Adapter SBA Overview Safe Brake Adapter Option K88 Supply voltage of the motor holding brake 230 V AC Max. permissible current consumption of the • Motor holding brake 2A • Fast de-energization 2A Max, permissable cable lengths • to the brake 990 ft (300 m) Max. wire size #12 AWG (2.5 mm2) Safety Integrated Safety Integrity Level 2 (SIL2) acc. to IEC 61508, Performance Level d (PLd) acc. to ISO 13849-1 and Control Category 3 acc. to ISO 13849-1 (previously EN 954-1) A Safe Brake Adapter SBA is required to safely control a motor holding brake via the Safe Brake Control (SBC) safety function according to IEC 61800-5-2. The Safe Brake Adapter is available for 230 V AC brake control voltages. It is available as option K88 or SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules. 6 Note: The SBA approval is currently only valid for IEC regions. The SBA is not yet UL listed and may not be included in a UL listed Cabinet Module line-up. 6/38 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 Integration The SBC function is controlled and monitored by the SINAMICS Drives firmware. The control and feedback signal regarding the switching state of the SBA relay is realized via terminals of the Control Interface Module (CIM). The excitation coil of the holding brake is connected directly at the SBA. SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Engineering Tools,5Service & Support 7 7/2 Engineering software Sizer for Siemens drives STARTER commissioning tool Drive Control Chart 7/6 Service & Support Service tool for exchanging power blocks Spare parts Complete lifecycle services Service & Support contacts Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Engineering software SIZER for Siemens Drives engineering tool The configuration process produces the following results: • A parts list of the required components (export to Excel, use of the Excel data sheet for import to SAP) • Technical specifications of the system • Characteristic curves • Comments on system reactions • Mounting arrangement of drive and control components and dimension drawings of motors • Energy requirements of the configured application These results are displayed in a results tree and can be reused for documentation purposes. Technological online help is available: • Detailed technical specifications • Information about the drive systems and their components • Decision-making criteria for the selection of components • Online help in German, English, French, Italian, Chinese and Japanese The following drives and controls can be engineered in a user-friendly way using the SIZER for Siemens Drives engineering tool: • SINAMICS Low Voltage, MICROMASTER 4, DYNAVERT T, SIMATIC ET 200S FC and SIMATIC ET 200pro FC drive systems • Motor starters • SINUMERIK CNC control • SIMOTION Motion Control System • SIMATIC Technology 7 It provides support when setting up the technologies involved in the hardware and firmware components required for a drive task. SIZER for Siemens Drives covers the full range of operations required to configure a complete drive system, from simple single drives to complex multi-axis applications. SIZER for Siemens Drives supports all of the configuring steps in a workflow: •Configuring the power supply •Selecting the motor and gearbox, including calculation of mechanical transmission elements •Configuring the drive components •Compiling the required accessories •Selecting the line-side and motor-side power options, e.g., cables, filters, and reactors When SIZER for Siemens Drives was being designed, particular importance was placed on a high degree of usability and a universal, function-based approach to the drive application. The extensive user guidance makes using the tool easy. Status information keeps you continually informed about the progress of the configuration process. The SIZER for Siemens Drives user interface is available in German, English, French and Italian. The drive configuration is saved in a project. In the project, the components and functions used are displayed in a hierarchical tree structure. The project view permits the configuration of drive systems and the copying/inserting/modifying of drives already configured. 7/2 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 System requirements • PG or PC with Pentium III min. 800 MHz (recommended > 1 GHz) • 512 MB RAM (1 GB RAM recommended) • At least 4.1 GB of free hard disk space • An additional 100 MB of free hard disk space on the Windows system drive • Screen resolution 1024 × 768 pixels (recommended 1280 × 1024 pixels) • Operating system - Windows XP Home Edition SP2 - Windows XP Professional 32 bit SP2 - Windows XP Professional 64 bit SP2 - Windows Vista Business - Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit - Windows 7 Professional 32 bit • Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Selection and ordering data Order No. SIZER for Siemens Drives engineering tool DVD-ROM German, English, French, Italian 6SL3070-0AA00-0AG0 More information The SIZER for Siemens Drives engineering tool is available free on the Internet at: www.siemens.com/sizer SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Engineering software STARTER commissioning tool For experts, the expert list can be used to specifically and quickly access individual parameters at any time. An individual compilation of frequently used parameters can be saved in dedicated user lists and watch tables. The user-friendly STARTER commissioning tool can be used for • Commissioning • Optimization • Diagnostics This software can be operated either as a standalone PC application, integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 with TIA compatibility via Drive ES Basic, or it can be integrated into the SCOUT engineering system (for SIMOTION). The basic functions and handling are the same in both cases. Configuring can be realized both offline as well as online. If several drives are connected to the selected communication bus, then an online connection can be established to several drives simultaneously. The project wizards can be used to create the drives within the structure of the project tree. Beginners are supported by solution-based dialog guidance, whereby a standard graphics-based display maximizes clarity when setting the drive parameters. First commissioning is guided by a wizard which makes all the basic settings in the drive. Therefore, getting a motor up and running is merely a question of setting a few of the drive parameters as part of the drive configuration process. The travel commands can be simply entered via the control panel from the PC. The individual settings can be made using the graphic parameterizing screen forms, which precisely visualize the drive mode of operation. Examples of individual settings that can be made include: • How terminals are used • Bus interface • Setpoint channel (e.g., fixed setpoints) • Closed-loop speed control (e.g., ramp-function generator, limits) • BICO interconnections • Diagnostics In addition, the following functions are available for optimization purposes: • Self-optimization of the controller settings (depending on the drive unit) • Trace to precisely record the signals (this depends on the drive unit, is not supported for - MICROMASTER 4 - SINAMICS G110 - SINAMICS G120 < FW V4.4 - SINAMICS G110D - SINAMICS G120D - SIMATIC ET 200S FC - SIMATIC ET 200pro FC) • Numerous measuring functions such as step functions and frequency response analysis Diagnostics functions provide information about: • Control/status words • Parameter status • Conditions of use • Communication states Performance features • User-friendly: Only a small number of settings need to be made for successful first commissioning: The motor starts to rotate • Solution-oriented dialog-based user guidance simplifies commissioning • Self-optimization functions reduce manual optimization work. System requirements V4.2 and higher • PG or PC Pentium III min. 1 GHz (recommended > 1 GHz) • 1 GB RAM (recommended 2 GB RAM) • Screen resolution 1024 ×768 pixels, 16 bit color depth • Free hard disk memory min. 3 GB • Software - Microsoft Internet Explorer V6.0 or higher - 32 bit operating systems: Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP2 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP3 Microsoft Windows 7 Professional incl. SP1 Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate incl. SP1 Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise incl. SP1 (Standard Installation) - 64 bit operating systems: Microsoft Windows 7 Professional SP1 Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate SP1 Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise SP1 (Standard Installation) Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 7/3 7 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Engineering software Integration The fieldbus communication between the Control Units of SINAMICS S120, SINAMICS S150, SINAMICS G130 and SINAMICS G150 can, depending on the CU version (DP or PN), be realized via PROFIBUS or PROFINET/Ethernet, alternatively, also via the serial RS232 interface. Further, there is the option of coupling SINAMICS S120, SINAMICS S150, SINAMICS G130, SINAMICS G150 and SINAMICS DC MASTER via SINAMICS Link, e.g. to establish a setpoint cascade. For commissioning and service, a PG/PC can be connected to the CU320-2 Control Unit via PROFIBUS. A PROFIBUS connection must be available with a connecting cable at the PG/PC. Further, communication between a CU320-2 Control Unit and PG/PC can also be established via Ethernet, either via an (optional) CBE20 Communication Board or the Ethernet interface -X127 on the CU320-2 Control Unit. Note on -X127: This terminal block is only intended for communication between a PG/PC for service and commissioning. Selection and ordering data Order No. STARTER commissioning tool For SINAMICS and MICROMASTER on DVD-ROM German, English, French, Italian, Spanish 6SL3072-0AA00-0AG0 Accessories SIMATIC S7 connecting cable RS232 null modem cable, 6 m 6ES7901-1BF00-0XA0 PROFIBUS communication module CP 5512 PCMCIA type 2 card + adapter with 9-pin SUB-D socket, for Windows 2000/Windows XP Professional and PCMCIA 32 6GK1551-2AA00 SIMATIC DP plug-in cable 12 Mbit/s, for PG connection, pre-assembled with 2 × 9-pin SUB-D connector, 3 m 6ES7901-4BD00-0XA0 PROFINET/Ethernet Standard-CAT5 Ethernet cable or PROFINET cable More information The STARTER commissioning tool is also available for update purposes on the Internet at www.siemens.com/starter 7 7/4 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Engineering software Drive Control Chart (DCC) Drive Control Chart (DCC) expands the scope of device functions by means of freely available closed-loop control, calculation and logic modules and offers a means by which technological functions can be graphically configured in the SINAMICS S120 drive system. DCC is installed as an additional application to the STARTER commissioning tool. The block library encompasses a large selection of closedloop, arithmetic and logic blocks, as well as comprehensive open loop and closed-loop control functions. For logically combining, evaluating and acquiring binary signals, all commonly used logic functions are available for selection (AND, XOR, on/off delay, RS flipflop, counter, etc.). A wide range of arithmetic functions, such as absolute value generation blocks, dividers and minimum/maximum evaluation are available to monitor and evaluate numerical quantities. In addition to the closed-loop drive control, axial winder functions, closed-loop PI controllers, ramp-function generators or wobble generators can be configured simply and easily. Drive Control Chart for SINAMICS S120 also provides a convenient basis for resolving drive-level open-loop and closed-loop control tasks directly in the converter. This further extends the possibility of adapting SINAMICS to the particular application. Local data processing in the drive supports the implementation of modular machine concepts and results in an increase in the overall machine performance. Minimum hardware and software requirements See the STARTER engineering software, since DCC is installed in addition to this. Selection and ordering data (options) DCC comprises the graphic configuring tool (DCC Editor) and the block library (DCB library). DCC is installed in addition to the SCOUT or STARTER engineering software. The engineering license required for each PC (floating) for DCC is purchased at the same time the order is placed; additional runtime licenses are not required. DCC can be ordered in two versions: as version for SIMOTION and SINAMICS applications, or as version for SINAMICS applications only. Existing licenses for DCC V2.1 can also be used for DCC V2.2 SP1. An upgrade variant for the engineering license can be selected for existing DCC V2.0 versions. Description Drive Control Chart expands the possibility for very simply configuring technological functions, both for the SIMOTION motion control system as well as for the SINAMICS S120 drive system. For users, this opens up a new dimension regarding the adaptability of the systems mentioned to the specific functions of their machines. DCC has no restrictions with regard to the number of usable functions; this is only limited by the performance capability of the target platform. The user-friendly DCC Editor enables easy graphics-based configuration, allows control loop structures to be clearly represented and provides a high degree of reusability of diagrams that have already been created. The open-loop and closed-loop control functions are defined by using multi-instance-capable blocks (Drive Control Blocks (DCBs)) from a pre-defined library (DCB library) that are selected and graphically linked with one another by dragging and dropping. Test and diagnostic functions allow the program behavior to be verified and, in the case of a fault, the cause identified. DCC SIMOTION/SINAMICS V2.2 SP1 for SCOUT/STARTER V4.3 SP1 Graphical configuration with drive Control Chart DCC Editor + DCB library for use on SIMOTION and SINAMICS S120 • Single Engineering License, with data carrier • Upgrade Engineering License, with data carrier DCC SINAMICS V2.2 SP1 for STARTER V4.3 SP1 Graphical configuration with drive Control Chart DCC Editor + DCB library for use on SINAMICS S120 • Single Engineering License, with data carrier • Upgrade Engineering License, with data carrier Order No. 6AU1810-1JA22-1XA0 6AU1810-1JA22-1XE0 6AU1810-1HA22-1XA0 6AU1810-1HA22-1XE0 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 7/5 7 SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Service tool Service tool Spare Parts Mounting device for power blocks SparesOnWeb – Online spart parts catalog Power block mounting device for installing and removing the power blocks for Basic Line Modules, Smart Line Modules, Active Line modules and Motor Modules in chassis format. SparesOnWeb is a web-based tool for determining the spare parts available for a SINAMICS drive. After you have registered and entered the serial number and order number, the spare parts available for the relevant unit are displayed. The mounting device is a mounting aid. It is placed in the front of the module and attached to the module. The telescopic rails allow the device to be adjusted to the installation height of the power blocks. Once the mechanical and electrical connections have been released, the power block can be removed from the module. 7 The power block is guided and supported by the guide rails on the handling device. Selection and ordering data Description Order No. Mounting device for installing and removing power blocks 6SL3766-1FA00-0AA0 7/6 Siemens D21.7 – 2013 www.siemens.com/sow SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules Service & Support Complete life cycle service For machine constructors, solution providers and plant operators: The service offering from Siemens industry, Automation and Drive Technologies includes comprehensive services for a wide range of different users in all sectors of the manufacturing and process industry. Our Service & Support accompanies you worldwide in all matters concerning automation and drives from Siemens. We provide direct on-site support in more than 100 countries through all phases of the life cycle of your machines and plants. To accompany our products and systems, we offer integrated and structured services that provide valuable support in every phase of the life cycle of your machine or plant – from planning and implementation through commissioning as far as maintenance and modernization. You have an experienced team of specialists at your side to provide active support and bundled know-how. Regular training courses and intensive contact among our employees – even across continents – ensure reliable service in the most diverse areas. Training Start-up and maintenance training Siemens Industry offers the following course for SINAMICS S120: Course name: SINAMICS S Setup & Maintenance Course code: SCT-DVSNAM1A Duration: 4¹⁄₂ Days This course provides training on Siemens’ SINAMICS S drive systems family. Student will gain experience necessary to setup and maintain the operation of the SINAMICS S. The course includes an analysis of required hardware, steps for a quick startup, as well as additional application dependent steps for configuration, tuning and troubleshooting. A working knowledge of the drive communications capabilities will also be presented. The course also covers the extensive diagnostic capabilities of the drive. Please see the Siemens Industry SITRAIN Internet site for dates and costs of scheduled classes at: http://www.usa.siemens.com/training Service & Support Contacts Pre-sales Support, Order Entry Please contact your local sales office. GA400 facility, Alpharetta, GA Phone: (770) 740-3000 e-mail: [email protected] Technical Support Inside USA, toll free: 1-800-333-7421 Outside USA: +1(423)262-5710 Online request: www.siemens.com/automation/support-request Customer Service, Field Services, Spare Parts & Repair Inside USA, toll free: 1-800-241-4453 Outside USA: +1(423)262-5711 e-mail: [email protected] Siemens D21.7 – 2013 7/7 7 Siemens Industry, Inc. 3333 Old Milton Parkway Alpharetta, GA 30005 1-800-241-4453 [email protected] www.usa.siemens.com/drives Subject to change without prior notice. Order No: DRCA-D2171-0313 All rights reserved. Printed in USA. ©2013 Siemens Industry, Inc. The information provided in this brochure contains merely general descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of further development of the products. An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract. Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG. Product names mentioned may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Specificationsare subject to change without notice.